JP2020031838A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: display means having at least a first numerical value display area and a second numerical value display area; and performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance in which a numerical value is updated in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area to be determined as a specific value and a special performance in which suggestion on the predetermined performance is made. As a special performance, a suggestion performance can be executed to the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area. In the case of super ready-to-win A, a character being an alley character is displayed and a ready-to-win performance is started. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ready-to-win performance, such as the end of the introduction part of the ready-to-win performance, the title of the super ready-to-win A is displayed and the sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is output, thereby notifying the title of the super ready-to-win A.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  A conventional gaming machine displays a plurality of timers (a first numerical display area and a second numerical display area), and performs an effect (special effect) when one of the timer values becomes 0 (specific value). (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-85082 A

  However, in Patent Literature 1, there is a problem that the entertainment for the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area is not performed at all, and thus the entertainment of the game cannot be improved.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving gaming interest.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or a remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical value display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer, A display unit (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modification 156SG-1;
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). -22 (A), FIG. 10-23 (A), and FIG. 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period. As shown in the portion in which the sum value is reported in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or as shown in Modification 156-1, the number of additional games is the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone of ART. The part to be added to both of the number of remaining games)
further,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The effect executing means is capable of executing an effect targeting only one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 10-22). In this manner, the normal timer effect period is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, and as shown in FIG. (A part notified by the timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B)
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the numerical value display area that is the target of the special effect.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The effect executing means includes, as the special effect, an effect indicating the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a second timer effect execution suggesting effect illustrated in FIG. 10-26 (F) of the modified example 155SG-2) and the effect already executed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect indicating a special change in a numerical value in the predetermined effect (for example, an addition effect shown in FIG. 10-26 (C) of the modified example 155SG-2).
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the special effect.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
An operation detecting means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation;
The effect performing means is capable of executing an action corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on a detection result of the operation detecting means,
In the first numerical display area, a first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer effect until the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach) is displayed as the predetermined effect. A display area in which the numerical value becomes the specific value when the time has elapsed,
The second numerical value display area includes a second period that is longer than the first period as the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), a cut-in effect starts from the start of the special timer effect). A display area in which the numerical value becomes the specific value when 45 seconds or 55 seconds until the start is elapsed;
During the second period, the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher than in the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect). Is executed, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest during the predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means,
A change effect (for example, a concealment effect shown in FIG. 10-28 as a modified example 156SG-2) that changes at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a visually unrecognizable state can be executed. ,
When at least one of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area is in the hard-to-recognize state, the numerical value of the numerical display area in the hard-to-recognize state is not set to the specific value (for example, a modification example). As shown in FIG. 10-28 as 156SG-2, the part where the concealment of the short timer ends before the short timer expires)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the change effect can be suitably executed.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

  Embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions according to the following means. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title for notifying the type of the reach effect at the start of the reach effect, as disclosed in JP-A-2006-101428. However, it is desired to enhance the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect of the means J1 is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of the means J2 is a game machine of the means J1,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 8C).
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

The game machine of means J3 is a game machine of means J1 or means J2,
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the control is performed in the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

The gaming machine of means J4 is a gaming machine of any of means J1 to means J3,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The game machine of means J5 is a game machine of means J4,
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The game machine of means J6 is a game machine of any of means J1 to means J5,
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The game machine of means J7 is a game machine of any of means J1 to means J6,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I)). )),
In the valid period of the detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is a gaming machine of any of means J1 to J7,
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (a first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). And the like, and a second suggestion display having a display size of a second size (a reach title image 31AK062 of a second size displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120),
The display means,
Elements of different modes (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d). ) Can be displayed (e.g., the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control related to providing game media.

The game machine of the means A1 is:
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted. (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode) Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output it to the payout control board 21TM037) 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit a connection confirmation command when the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control micro 2. The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, Since the microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is turned on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. And based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, control is performed to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not perform ball rental.

The game machine of means A2 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
The game control means includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The provision means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can provide a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in any one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 outputting the connection confirmation signal Will be executed after exiting the mode and after exiting the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means A3 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and based on the input of the first predetermined signal, the gaming device Game media can be provided based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input; When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
At least one of the game control means and the provision means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detection means (an open state detection means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is open). A gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open, Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, the provision of the game medium can be restricted.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means outputs a preparation signal in response to the input of the provision request signal from the gaming device (the BRQ signal is turned on) (turns on the EXS signal) and outputs the provision signal. A game medium is provided when an application command signal output from the gaming device according to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that has detected the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal),
When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected on). do not do),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is ON), control is performed to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (Displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “Setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and executes a setting confirmation mode command when received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming machine. The invention according to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of the means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal outputted from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted. When the connection confirmation signal is on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the ball lending regardless of whether the period is controlled to the setting change mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
The game machine of the means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (e.g., a power failure). After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the ball lending when the power is cut off during the ball lending, and resumes the power supply after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately resuming the ball lending),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, even when the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of the means B3 is
The game machine of the means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is ended (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the power is cut off during the ball lending operation). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and the ball lending is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of restoring power, and the setting change is not performed. Ball rental is not resumed even after the end of the mode or setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When controlled to the setting change mode, game information is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the gaming state is initialized (display). The character "C" is displayed on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “Setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and executes a setting confirmation mode command when received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes through a specific area when changing a set value. The invention according to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of the means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) according to the set value (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
When being controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (control to the setting change mode prior to the setting of the timer interrupt (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed.

The game machine of the means C2 is
A game machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of the means C3 is
A game machine of means C1 or means C2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (Displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “Setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and executes a setting confirmation mode command when received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the control mode is set to the setting confirmation mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of the means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when a set value is changed. The invention relating to the means D1 to D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of the means D1 is
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state) to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The setting value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter When the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (the control mode is switched to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can appropriately set the set value in the case where the power supply is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of the means D2 is
The gaming machine of the means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and performs an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on). Control) to perform the setting change mode when the
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of the means D3 is
A game machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the game control means including a game control microcontroller for executing a game control timer interrupt process; Computer 100)
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing the effect control,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means D5 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt processing after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 outputs a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch). When the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at a timing after the power supply is started.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of a process related to a change in a set value on an external device side. is there.

The game machine of the means E1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means E2 is
The game machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
Setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepared,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting corresponding change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting change is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
The game machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting corresponding change signal). For 30 seconds from the end of the security signal)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the control may be performed in the change mode.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify outside that there is a possibility that the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E5 is
The game machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF). Is controlled to the setting check mode)
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is confirmed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
The game machine of means E1,
Setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepared,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means E7 is
The game machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting check mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting check mode capable of checking the set value when power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepared,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E7,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Setting check mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting check mode capable of checking the set value,
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed by operating the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and operating the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed while neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch operation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 has been operated, the operation of the lock switch has been detected. , A warning that “operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp information related to the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication (Paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to the means F1 to F11 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on an external device side.

The gaming machine of the means F1 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of the means F2,
The gaming machine of the means F1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Outputting the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the set value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of the means F3 is
The game machine of means F2,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is turned on during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled) is output when the setting change mode is being controlled, and with the end of the setting change mode. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after temporarily turning off the setting change corresponding signal with the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting the special signal of the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the control is set to the setting check mode and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of means F5 is
A game machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode) is output when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the displayed set value) is obtained. Output the setting change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control is set to the setting confirmation mode by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of the means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses. (By setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value, the set value can be specified in the external device. is there),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to easily specify the set value in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of the means F8 is
A game machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified externally with a simple configuration.

The game machine of means F9 is:
A game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change corresponding signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of the means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052);
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation has been performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal. ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output process by executing the common signal output process regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of means F11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output at the end of the process related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the set change mode). And outputs a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode. After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output at a predetermined timing different from the processing related to the change of the set value (for example, the end of the big hit game state) (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). Output the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined timing, and therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the external device to specify the setting value.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention relating to the means G1 to G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control related to providing a game medium.

The gaming machine of the means G1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a game value (pachinko ball),
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the game machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the game machine is opened (for example, the game machine frame 3). Means (a game machine frame open sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) And a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300).
Regardless of whether the setting change mode is controlled or not, when the open state is detected, the provision of the game value is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process is not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means G2 is
The gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is provided with the open state detection means (game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a gaming machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. When (the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, processing in step S21TM3530 and subsequent steps is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine frame or the door frame from being controlled to the setting change mode in a state where the open state is not detected.

The game machine of means G3 is
The game machine of the means G1 or the means G2,
A specific information storage unit (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of the setting change flag) that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can set a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (game). When the setting changing flag is set after turning on the power, the control microcomputer 100 sets the gaming machine frame 3 to the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 to the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 to the ON state. If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied under the condition that the condition is satisfied, the process does not shift to the normal game processing, and loops until the power is turned off.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the game can be set to the stop state.

The game machine of means G4 is
A game machine of means G3,
In response to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (the value of the setting change flag) is deleted (YES is determined in step S21TM3530 based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is set. The processing is ended, and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game process after the setting change mode ends.

The game machine of means G5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to give the game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When neither the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the payout of the game medium is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value includes the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to give the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means G6 is
A game machine of means G5,
The providing means (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the dispensing motor 21TM289) includes:
Executing a game value assignment based on receiving information (payout number) relating to the assignment of the game value from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 executing the game control timer interrupt process);
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (number of unpaid numbers) relating to a game value to be given;
The storage means is capable of storing the additional information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the giving means executes the giving of the game value in accordance with the adding information stored in the storage means (the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium). If this occurs, the payout of the game media is interrupted, the interrupted payout is resumed after the power is turned on, and the unpaid number of game media is paid out),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is possible to store the grant information regarding the game value to be granted, and to store the information after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to assign a game value corresponding to the assignment information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The game machine of means G7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G6,
It can be connected to a gaming device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which controls the payout motor 21TM289) executes the giving of the game value based on the signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) outputted from the gaming machine,
When the open state is detected, the provision of the game value based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (the gaming machine frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided for the gaming machine). When detecting opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout of the game medium is executed. Is not done),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the provision of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is limited, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem associated with the giving operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, Maintenance work or the like while the gaming machine frame or door frame is open can be smoothly advanced.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
Along with the control in the setting confirmation mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (in the case of control in the setting change mode, based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, in step S21TM3040) If the determination is YES, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3050, or if the determination is YES in step S21TM3140, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3150. Is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040 based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, so that the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050 or is determined to be NO in step S21TM3140. Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether to initialize the game state.

The game machine of means G9 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
The additional information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). At the same time, the RAM clearing in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed, so the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not paid out. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the grant information on the gaming value to be granted, so that management at the gaming shop can be facilitated.

The game machine of means G10 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
Regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized, the additional information is not initialized. Also, since the RAM clearing in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is not initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the assignment information is not initialized, so that information on the game value to be assigned can be appropriately protected.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. With respect to a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the state of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the state of execution of processing related to a change in a set value are determined by an external device. In some cases, it is necessary to distinguish and recognize them. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, the external device side needs to recognize both. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The invention according to the means H1 to H5 has been made in view of the above situation, and the external device side distinguishes the occurrence situation of a predetermined event in a gaming machine and the execution situation of a process related to a change of a set value on an external device side. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The game machine of the means H1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine, and processing (setting change) related to the change of the set value Mode), and can output a specific signal.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode because the RAM is cleared. Is output for 30 seconds, and if the RAM is cleared and controlled to the setting change mode, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of the means H2 is
A game machine of means H1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting is changed to the setting change mode and the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between control in the setting change mode and control in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means H3 is
A game machine of means H1 or means H2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the shift operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 has been operated have been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch Is detected on the image display device 5), and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected."
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means H4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H3,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value can be performed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of means H5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to the means I1 to I6 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution state of a process related to a set value on an external device side. .

The game machine of the means I1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
In response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value, the output of the specific signal (security signal) is started,
Stopping the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than a predetermined period (when the control signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when the control signal is controlled to the setting confirmation mode). , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means I2 is
A gaming machine according to means I1,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) generated in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (for the security signal, RAM clear is executed. When the setting change mode is not controlled, the signal is output for 30 seconds. When the RAM is cleared and the setting change mode is controlled, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of the means I3 is
A game machine of means I1 or means I2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting is changed to the setting change mode and the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means I4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I3,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the shift operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 has been operated have been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch Is detected on the image display device 5), and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected."
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of the means I5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output according to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value can be performed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of the means I6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I5,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output according to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of displaying a holding icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to means K1 to means K7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine which enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means K1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
A display control unit (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-reserve display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, a variable display corresponding to the first information and a common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the mode of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the mode of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 13C, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003). The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information, as information corresponding to common variable display, thereby improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. And interest in the aspect of the first information and the second information.

The game machine of means K2 is
The game machine of means K1,
The form of the first information after the change is different from the form of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue form is a blue circle display). , The blue mode sub-hold display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means K3 is
A game machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the rate of controlling to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, as compared with the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is a red color mode, the expectation of big hit is higher)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K3,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a mode common to the first hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in (9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode, which is the same display color. Is displayed)),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105) and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Displaying a corresponding display (sub active display area 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105);
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red color mode) in the same display color as the red mode is displayed. (Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of information, that is, first correspondence information and second correspondence information can be displayed as information corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. This can be improved, and the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be made interesting.

The game machine of means K5 is:
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K4,
A notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in an area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (the effect control CPU 120) is capable of hiding the first information in accordance with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “reach !!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and the active (Display 30TM003 is not displayed, while sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, information on the variable display is confirmed even during execution of the notification effect. Can be possible.

The game machine of means K6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) places a first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the active variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Displaying a second corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect performed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect performed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode) The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. This is the mode of executing the action of flying a balloon
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the aspect of the first action effect is different from the mode of the second action effect, so that interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays the second information Is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the rate of controlling the player to an advantageous state is different (as shown in FIG. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 changes than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 changes. When the display mode changes, the big hit expectation is higher.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of displaying a holding icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to L7 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
A display control unit (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-reserve display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, a variable display corresponding to the first information and a common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the mode of the first information is changed, at least a part of the announcement effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 13-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is When it changes, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information as information corresponding to a common variable display, it is possible to suppress an effect from being complicated and to enhance interest. be able to.

The game machine of the means L2 is
The game machine of the means L1,
The form of the first information after the change is different from the form of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue form is a blue circle display). , The blue mode sub-hold display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of the means L3 is
A game machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the rate of controlling to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, as compared with the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is a red color mode, the expectation of big hit is higher)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means L4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L3,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a mode common to the first hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in (9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode, which is the same display color. Is displayed)),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105) and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Displaying a corresponding display (sub active display area 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105);
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red color mode) in the same display color as the red mode is displayed. (Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of information, that is, first correspondence information and second correspondence information can be displayed as information corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. This can be improved, and the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be made interesting.

The game machine of the means L5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L4,
A notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in an area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (the effect control CPU 120) is capable of hiding the first information in accordance with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “reach !!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and the active (Display 30TM003 is not displayed, while sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, information on the variable display is confirmed even during execution of the notification effect. Can be possible.

The game machine of the means L6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) places a first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the active variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Displaying a second corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect performed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect performed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode) The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. This is the mode of executing the action of flying a balloon
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the aspect of the first action effect is different from the mode of the second action effect, so that interest can be improved.

The game machine of means L7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays the second information Is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the rate of controlling the player to an advantageous state is different (as shown in FIG. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 changes than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 changes. When the display mode changes, the big hit expectation is higher.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144581 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed every time the pseudo continuous change is executed. Have been. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-144585 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means M1 to M6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect executing means, as a change suggestion effect, displays a successful mode change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) and (2), the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003). An effect in which the ball is thrown by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20). ) Is possible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, within a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of the change to the establishment of the reach state, the decoration symbol is started from the start of the change (re-change (pseudo-run) after the temporary stop). The next change suggestion effect is during the period from the start of the change until the first of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stops first) during the period until the temporary stop of the combination of the decorative symbols or the pseudo continuous symbol). The execution ratio is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%) (If the suggestion effect is executed and one time is a success mode and one time is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means M2 is
The gaming machine according to the means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (the active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled in the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the final display of the active display). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects, the ratio of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects) The greater the number of hits, the higher the jackpot expectation, and the greater the number of successive success mode change suggestions, the higher the jackpot expectation, even with active display of the same display color.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of the means M3 is
A game machine of means M1 or M2,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 13 to 18, the temporary stop is not performed with respect to the change display of the decorative symbol when the change suggestion effect is being executed). (The direction of movement does not change.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means M4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, a different type of change suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 13-18 (1), after execution of the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears as shown in FIG.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

The gaming machine of the means M5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which a character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character C appears, A change suggestion effect in which the character D appears)
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the specific mode corresponding display is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. (Character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect, and has a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the means M6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, character D). Change suggestion effect that appears) can be executed,
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect. High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144581 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed every time the pseudo continuous change is executed. Have been. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-144585 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means N1 to N6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of the means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect execution means, as a change suggestion effect, as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 13-18 (1) and (2), the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in FIGS. The effect of changing the display mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20)), the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. Effect) that can be performed,
During a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the time when the reach state is established), the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-continuous symbol in which re-fluctuation (pseudo ream) will be performed after the temporary stop) is temporarily set. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period until the stop, the period from the start of the change to the first stop of any of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns) Accordingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), [the number of executions of the change suggestion of the success mode] with respect to the [the number of executions of the change suggestion]. Is higher, the bigger the jackpot expectation is, the more likely the display mode is. For example, the display mode when [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 2/3 is a blue mode. Next Display mode when it is 4/5 is more jackpot expected high degree of red aspect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means N2 is
A game machine of means N1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) differs (as shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the big hit expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display). Different),
Depending on the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects, the ratio of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects) The greater the number of hits, the higher the jackpot expectation, and the greater the number of successive success mode change suggestions, the higher the jackpot expectation, even with active display of the same display color.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of the means N3 is
A game machine of means N1 or means N2,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 13 to 18, the temporary stop is not performed with respect to the change display of the decorative symbol when the change suggestion effect is being executed). (The direction of movement does not change.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means N4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, a different type of change suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 13-18 (1), after execution of the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears as shown in FIG.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

The game machine of means N5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which a character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which a character C appears, A change suggestion effect in which the character D appears)
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the specific mode corresponding display is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. (Character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect, and has a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of the means N6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, character D). Change suggestion effect that appears) can be executed,
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect. High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. In the case of a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when the setting value is changed or the like. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of the means O1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value;
A specific signal output unit (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode control; ,
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (the value of the security signal timer) relating to the period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the setting confirmation mode With the end, the security signal is continuously output until one second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until thirty seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
The game machine of means O1,
Initialization means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes a game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting unit can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (If the RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465)
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode along with the end of the setting change mode). Continue to output security signal until 30 seconds elapse)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value both when the control in the setting change mode is completed and when the control in the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the setting change is performed. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting process by the setting unit is common and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The period can be set.

The game machine of means O3 is
A game machine of means O1 or means O2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) to end the setting change mode in the setting change mode. The setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode in the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102), which stores the specific information (setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit a set value error error command in step S21TM4190, and display a display monitor in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification prompting an operation for changing a setting value (“the power supply is turned on again after the power is turned off, and the setting change mode is set. Please migrate! "Message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk of the game arcade, and to urge the operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing the set value. The invention according to the means P1 to P4 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of a gaming machine when power supply is stopped when a set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, an error notification means capable of executing an error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means P2 is
The game machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch (setting Changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state), and can be controlled to the setting change mode,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the satisfaction of the setting change condition (when power is turned on, all of the steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are performed). (Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the condition controlled by the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is switched to the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided to appropriately set the setting value. You can prompt a change.

The game machine of the means P3 is
A game machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification and set the game to a stop state (when the power-on condition is not satisfied, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (any one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If NO is determined in step S21TM4200, the process proceeds to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
Said specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and to transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit a setting value error error command in step S21TM4190, and display in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification prompting an operation for changing a setting value (“the power supply is turned on again after the power is turned off, and the setting change mode is set. Please migrate! "Message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk of the game arcade, and to urge the operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines a state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. Is to do.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). When the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting change switch) Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
Note that the game machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150, and The game control microcomputer 100) that executes the clear (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
The gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, based on a setting change condition being satisfied, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. And the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the end of the setting change mode due to the ON state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If the setting change condition is satisfied, control is performed in the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030). ), Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A game machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 Is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Is executed), that is, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and it is possible to control to the setting change mode. Specific operation (in step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 was turned off) It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 in which the control of the setting change mode ends) based on
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed Control is performed in the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not. The setting change mode is automatically controlled) and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680). Make
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the condition for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different);
Control according to the set values stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting value stored in the setting value storage unit is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off). Exits the configuration change mode based on the
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode, the setting value storage unit changes the setting value in the setting change mode by the change operation. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is set. Will be changed, so even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the changed value will be retained after the change operation.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since the control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different);
Control according to the set values stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting change mode (clear switch) 21TM052 when the setting change mode is controlled in the setting change mode. Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area), and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area). To set as a valid set value and exit the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means is configured to execute the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is being controlled. The set value before being set is stored (even when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled by the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

Further, as a gaming machine of means QA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). When it is determined that the game machine is set, control is performed in the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set). (Setting changeover switch) Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not a condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.)
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or a remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical value display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer, A display unit (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modification 156SG-1;
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). -22 (A), FIG. 10-23 (A), and FIG. 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period. As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. A part to be added to both of the number of remaining games).

  According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined. Further, since the special effect is executed at an appropriate timing after a predetermined period corresponding to the specific effect has elapsed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the execution frequency of the predetermined effect may be associated with the set value of the gaming machine. For example, the higher the set value of the gaming machine, the higher the execution frequency of the predetermined effect may be. By doing so, the set value can be estimated based on the predetermined effect, and the interest is improved.

  Further, the execution frequency of the special effect may be associated with the set value of the gaming machine. For example, the higher the set value of the gaming machine, the higher the execution frequency of the special effect may be. By doing so, the set value can be estimated based on the special effect, and the interest is improved.

  In addition, the setting value may be suggested in a special effect mode in which a suggestion regarding the predetermined effect is made. For example, in a timer effect as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-24, a plurality of types and colors of the time display are prepared, and the time display is set so that the set value is more advantageous for the player. May be increased at a higher rate. Alternatively, the more the set value is advantageous to the player, the more flashy the time display color is (for example, black or blue for an unfavorable set value, or red or rainbow for an advantageous set value). ) The ratio may be increased. By doing so, the setting value is suggested in the special effect mode, and the opportunity to estimate the setting value can be given to the player, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that the gaming machines of means Q2 to Q5 applicable to the gaming machine of means Q1 described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means QA described above.

  Also, the game machine of the means QA initializes the game state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150, the RAM A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern for loss determination table. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process processing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process in a modified example. It is a flow chart which shows a part of effect control main processing in a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. It is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit type determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits. It is a figure showing a game control data holding area. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for effect control. It is a figure which shows a part of effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view of a determination ratio of a normal timer effect and a special timer effect, and each timer effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the reach notification mode in the normal timer effect, and the effect result determination ratio of the button operation effect during the special timer effect. It is a figure showing a production mode decision ratio of a cut-in production. It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of each timer effect execution suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal timer effect execution process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special timer effect execution processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of button operation production execution processing. It is a flowchart at the time of performing only a normal timer effect. It is a flowchart at the time of performing only a special timer effect, and a flowchart at the time of performing both a normal timer effect and a special timer effect. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example in which ball lending is not restricted during the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows the example which restarts payout after the end of a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example in which payout is forcibly terminated in accordance with a shift to a setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control at the time of normal operation. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a signal output from each output terminal. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a set value and an output mode of a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) a diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. . It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting ball lending based on detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting ball lending after completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming ball lending without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off to forcibly end ball lending. It is a timing chart which shows the method which changes to a setting change mode after power-off and restarts ball lending. It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting award ball payout based on detection of an open state of a gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting award ball payout after completion of the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting award ball payout without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating award ball payout. It is a timing diagram showing a method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and restarting the prize ball payout. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold | maintenance display and active display. It is a flowchart which shows a change effect determination process. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set at power-on. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device having an electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

  (Outline of the progress of the game)

  A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations described later, and the like) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects a detection signal (a game ball is passed or passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal and a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or a big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random number value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. If the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, the interrupt is disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interruption permission, and then ends the command reception interruption processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach-losing pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". -2. The display results are "big hits" such as reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8B and FIG. 8C are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops, and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect) ends, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of super reach A (here, the character of "SP reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound (here, "super reach A") corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach B title is displayed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8G, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed. Is performed, the subsequent portion of the reach effect of the super reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) In the introduction part before the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach is to be made since the super-reach effect is started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Also, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation indicator indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge, or may be indicated. May be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of the degree of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a predetermined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The determined effect includes a determined effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a determined effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when an extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the title of Super Reach A is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating that the device has failed) may be displayed. It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when informing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be raised by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and fits in the white star of the expectation indication display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of title notification and expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted so as to shine. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is specified. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), another reach production (title notification, expectation degree) is performed. (Including a suggestion effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation indication display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays indicating the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character of “SP Reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that improves the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, and thus the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at a determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the display color of the title of the super reach is changed from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the title display color changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-7. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C) according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the dialogue in the reach effect include “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialog may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (Step AK31S001; No), whether or not to perform other notice effects and the effect form are determined (Step AK31S004). After that, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination process ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, the title advance notice and the dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but in the case of the specific super reach (for example, other than the super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, the title announcement and the dialogue of the dialogue have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of the effect on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be performed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information relating to other effects (notice of mainly displaying characters). You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 31AK-1 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in the modification 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character which is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  8C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 along with the reach effect. Thereby, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in the modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part. Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, an image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In the modification 31AK-1, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The reliability of the big hit in the case of being done is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and 8-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modified Example 31AK-2 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability and displayed with a plurality of types of elements included in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title of red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notifies the game effect lamp 9 by emitting light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the shutter effect is performed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, at the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed at the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is performed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. In addition, although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 8F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thus, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8D are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8. In this case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. Note that a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described feature section 31AK, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 122SG051 for switching between a setting change state in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed and a setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked. A setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later in a setting change state, and an opening sensor 122SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

  The setting switch main body provided with a player-operable operation unit such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052 is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 122SG201 so that operation is possible without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

  Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, and the predetermined door key is The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade, only the store clerk having the set key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using a setting key. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys has been illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

  Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And an LED control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 9A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, a command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to be generated on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first starting port winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for reporting the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation of changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for wp notification that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in a setting change state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is the super reach variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β. It is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super-reach effect of super-reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these variation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-5, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times and the variation pattern becomes the super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to a game control program, various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and FIG. -6 (C), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), and a big hit type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), a large hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), and a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value, a winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit is changed. Has become. The set value has three stages from 1 to 3; 3 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 2 and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value, which is the largest value 3, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, 1 becomes the more advantageous value for the game arcade side.

  FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high-precision state), the normal state or the time-saving state (low) (Judgment state) is assigned to the special map display result of “big hit”. Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/250 when the set value is 2, and 1/99 when the set value is 3) In comparison, the probability that the special map display result is determined to be controlled to the big hit game state with the “big hit” as the big hit is increased (in the feature section 122SG of this embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/150, and the set value is 1/99 for 2 and 1/50 for 3 That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-precision state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state or the time saving state. Is determined, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the small hitting game state and controlled to the small hitting game state is the same. Have been. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), the special figure display result is set to “small hit” to control the small hit game state regardless of the game state and the set value. Then, the probability to be determined is set to 1/200. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and the control is made to control the small hitting game state regardless of the set value is the same probability is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the special figure display result to “small hitting” may be changed according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set to “big hit” or “small hit”, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is low, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special map display result is set to "big hit" or "small hit". The judgment value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to be controlled when the state is controlled is increased (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 3> setting value 2> setting value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). If any one of the hit determination values matches, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). When MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be set as the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), an example is shown in which the winning probability of a small hit is made different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are separately provided for each set value, and it is individually determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. Is also good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), the judgment values are assigned to the small hits in the respective display result judgment tables, but as shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). In the display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among them, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is changed and displayed). It is a table in the case of doing. In addition, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is one of the big hits A to C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability high-base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a big change big hit) which shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state is set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by “big hit A” is executed by executing a predetermined number of special figure games (100 times in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-precision control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which three types of big hits A to big hit C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit types are two. You may provide less than the kind, or four or more kinds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time-saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hit B and the big hit C in which both the positive change and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the fluctuating special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 3 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 1 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, if the set value is “1” in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. (No judgment value is assigned to the big hit B).

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Among the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 1 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is the big hit varies depending on the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random value for big hit type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger hit probability and the smaller hit probability are increased, and the big hit C as the big hit type is determined. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous the player may be. .

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the form in which the gaming property itself does not change is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming properties may be changed according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is set to a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation state loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable prize ball device 7 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to the certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special figure (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during the high base (during the time reduction control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, when changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes the predetermined region, Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the fact that a game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is the jackpot A is used. ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take The value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, one of the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 Up to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 301 to 800 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated, and the fluctuation patterns 801 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, , 1 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 351 to 997 are assigned to It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, from 1 to 997 of the determination value range of MR3, 1 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. Higher, and lower in order of set values 3, 2, 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is determined. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9C, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any one of 1, 2, and 3, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 0. Of 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values 1, 2, and 3, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined at a different ratio from the plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A, which is used when the number of stored games is one or less in a low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range where the random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4, are reduced. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the loss variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Are allocated to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are allocated to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for the number of low base medium total pending storages of 5 or more), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control. PA2-2) and a predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3).

  As shown in FIG. 9D, in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach variation pattern is , Set values 3, 2, and 1 in this order. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and the variation values of 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is lost, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  It should be noted that the “common determination ratio” in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is not only the one in which the determination ratio is completely the same with different set values (the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment), but also different set values. (For example, the setting ratio of the super reach variation pattern differs by about 1% between the set values 1 to 3).

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value, the non-reach, the normal reach, and the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of the super reach are the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although an example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss, regardless of the set value. Exemplifies a mode in which the set value is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different according to the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns may be present among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is smaller than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), the variation is determined by using a loss Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different loss pattern determination table depending on the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol (in the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The ranges of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the super reach loss variation pattern varies according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is performed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the super reach loss. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter, and the like. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The first special map holding storage unit stores the special map which has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The storage unit stores data of a game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure game is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but the starting has not yet started. The game data (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit stores the hold information of the general figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, a game control main process in the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . In 122SGSa005, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on a parity bit and a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa008). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again, and waits until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), a set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the salesclerk at the game hall displays the set value. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in a state (set change state) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by visually checking the monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or when the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after the execution of the set value confirmation process. That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated without being operated, the set value is confirmed if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is impossible.

  In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in a state before the power interruption, transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

  In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again to stand by until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then turns the lock switch 122SG051 ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

  If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021 ( 122SGSa019).

  Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). If the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is open, a setting change process (122SGSa020) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 And the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, the set value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. ing.

  If the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in the 122SGSa019a, it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

  In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and an interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)). The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034) and sends a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. Then, the setting value confirmation processing is completed (122SGSa035).

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the state is the same as the case of starting by a normal hot start by terminating the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation processing). The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

  FIG. 9A is a flowchart illustrating the RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

  On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 by specifying the top address in the RAM 102 (122SGSa044).

  In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” at the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the specified address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), and if the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area of the RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, other addresses (F002, F003, etc.) include clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, as well as special figure storage and general figure storage. Game information including storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among other areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, The pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process may be prompted to be restarted by a display on the display device 5 or the like.

  In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment means that if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, the addresses (F001 to FXXX) except the address (F000) where the set value is stored are stored. ) Stores “00H” in the RAM 102 to clear data other than the set value, but when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or when there is no backup data, “00H” is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

  In the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the first address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Is also good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, when executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 9A, the address immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 is used as the address for clearing the data. , And "00H" may be stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, an example is described in which data other than the set value in the RAM 102 is cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. It may be.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted, and the processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

  FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the start of the set value change process (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored at the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a set value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as the temporary set value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one step more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. The value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 (the provisional set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, thereby changing the set value stored in the address F001 to the actual set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the end of the setting change process).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of this embodiment, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (the provisional set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball can be placed in the starting winning opening, the clear switch can be operated, the lock switch 122SG051 can be pushed, and the like. By executing the operation described above, the lock switch 122SG051 may be turned off, so that a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a set value change start is issued to the effect control board 12. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and executes the RAM clearing process again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). May be cleared). By doing so, it is possible to prevent such a problem that a game is started while illegal data is stored in the RAM.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the common RAM clearing process (122SGSa017) is executed after the execution of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the cold start and the setting change state by the common RAM clearing process. Although a mode according to the state (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, or a setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a setting change state, a command (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, a setting value change Common RAM clear after sending the end notification command) to the effect control board 12 It may perform the physical.

  Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020), and then executes processes from a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). . As shown in FIGS. 9 to 16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown). Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect control main process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets a CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation is executed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer corresponding to a command reception waiting period of a command transmitted from main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404). If the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  Then, when the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (in the player information input process described later, the player After accepting the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

  If no hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) , Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (122SGS408), and that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, display of an image on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to be able to notify the clerk of the amusement arcade or the like that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (122SGS407; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether a setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a notification that the setting value changing operation is being performed (a notification that the setting value is being changed) is issued. ) Is executed (122SGS411). Note that the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open and the clerk of the amusement arcade changing the setting value uses the main board 11 Of the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the camera. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game hall where the setting value is changed. It is considered from the display of the device 5 that it is impossible to determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the notification during the setting value change, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the clerk of the game hall where the setting value is changed. You just need to be informed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has ended (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). The value is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the above-described processing of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processing of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 is repeatedly executed.

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the notification of the change of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the notification of the change of the set value, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the notification of the change of the set value. Notification may be performed.

  If the set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value check start notification command has been received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting check state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). If the setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (122SGS414; Y), a setting value confirmation informing process for notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state (the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029). Execute (122SGS415). In the notification process during the setting value confirmation, the display of an image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It suffices if the setting confirmation state can be reported around the pachinko gaming machine 1. If no effect of the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, and issues a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414).

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( While the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of the player information are cleared from the RAM 122, the effect information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach count and the set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. The data is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. Illustrates a form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, The player information and the production information may be cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays the image. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the received command is started in the device 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial design. When the received command is the set value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "from the left as an initial symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. The display of the decorative symbol is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous for the player is When set, the decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when the setting value (for example, "3") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous for the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous for the player is The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where the setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. In addition, when the setting value (for example, “1”) that is advantageous to the player is set, and when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R output The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). Thereafter, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in a timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the startup notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table by executing the start-up notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. The notification may be performed.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the output sound A starts for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  Further, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R to emit light for 30 seconds. Output of the output sound A, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Performing the output of B includes both.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the set value change end notification command when it is activated, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value has been completed) Execute It should be noted that the emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Differently, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In other words, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 40 seconds and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. C, and display of a message image on the image display device 5 for 40 seconds.

  As described above, the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts to emit light, the timing at which sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R starts, and the timing at which image display is started on the image display device 5 are the same. Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) is 60 seconds, and the cold start notification command is issued. When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the set value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer of a game arcade or a counter of each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start-up notification at this time, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. A device that performs start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal is output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed”, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, when a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be made different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (the time until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is used as the setting value change notification. During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is used commonly for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification process, a form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is performed even when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, and a set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

  In addition, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initializing effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or pachinko gaming machine 1 Is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may be all different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part of them may be the same.

  Further, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, started in a cold start, started in a setting change state, or started in a setting confirmation state, Also, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or started in a setting confirmation state, the start notification is performed. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, effect control CPU 120 executes power-off detection processing (122 SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; N), the processing is terminated. The backup data to be included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the processing shifts to a loop processing in which none of the processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9C) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (122SGS425) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (122SGS426), A player information output process of outputting player information (122SGS427) and an effect information totaling process of totaling effect information (122SGS428) are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to set a password (a password generated by an external server in which game information of the player is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of times of change, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone and transmit the player information totalized in the current game to an external server, thereby obtaining a pachinko gaming machine. 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of large hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect control process processing in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag is performed. Perform the above processing.

  When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any one of “2” to “7” (122SGS442; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the processing is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby displaying the variable display four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated, based on the start-up prize determination process (see FIG. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  In addition, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or in a setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game has become possible. As a setting, an example in which the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is regulated over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start. Regardless of whether the game has been started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game has become possible, the settings relating to the progress of the game are set according to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The effect setting and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 in feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8H, effect control CPU 120 determines whether super reach A or super reach B is the first suggestion effect. The reach effect and the reach effect of super reach C or super reach D as the second suggestion effect can be executed, and when the reach effect of super reach C or super reach D is executed, the super reach C And the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D is notified from the start of the reach production of Super Reach D, and the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach production can be executed. Can be improved.

Further, the present embodiment also includes the following invention 122SG. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. ), A command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. A command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed-up memory regardless of the memory where the main board is backed up, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is powered on and activated, the effect control board is Making it impossible perform appropriate processing according to the movement state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the invention 122SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102) capable of holding the stored content for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 clears the RAM shown in FIGS. 9-17) that can control the effect based on the control information (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3) output from the game control means. A notification process, a notification process during a setting value change, a notification process during a setting value check, etc.),
With
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control means sets a startup state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and restores the first startup based on the storage content stored in the backup storage means. State (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) for erasing and restoring the stored contents regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible. , And outputs different control information corresponding to the activated state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the CPU 103 transmits a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and the pachinko gaming machine When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start mode, the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12. The part that sends the setting value change start notification command)
According to this feature, it is possible for the effect control means to execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. .

Further, as means 2 of invention 122SG,
An effect control storage means (for example, a RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
The information to be erased among the information stored in the effect control storage means differs between the case where the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state and the case where the third activation state. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, an appropriate erasure can be performed according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) for designating the end of the third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activation state based on the output of the control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20). Thus, based on the reception of the set value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process, Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Further, as means 4 of invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by a specific control that a starting state in which a set value cannot be set is provided.

Further, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 In the start-up notification process, the CPU 120 for effect control performs based on the part that emits the light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds and receives the cold start notification command. In the start-up notification process, a portion for executing the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect of controlling the production control based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. The CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process. A part for outputting the output sound C and executing a message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command and the cold start notification command, The decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as the initial symbol, and the decorative symbol is set to "4" or "5" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. , "6")
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in effect.

Further, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activation state, the game control unit deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage unit except for the specific information (for example, the modified example 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 except the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information according to a change in a set value.

Further, as means 7 of the invention 122SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing at which at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in a modified example 122SG-4, a pachinko machine). When the gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the setting change state, , RAM clear processing is executed at the timing after the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute erasing of game information at an appropriate timing according to an activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 123SG. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when the main board is backed up regardless of the backed up storage (general start-up state) and when the set value of the gaming machine can be changed (set start-up state) If the notification mode is the same, it is difficult to identify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and it is difficult to find an illegal setting change or the like of the gaming machine. Was. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of Means 1 of Invention 123SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Backup storage means (for example, the RAM 102 or the RAM 122) capable of holding the stored contents for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Start-up notifying means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start-up notifying process shown in FIGS. 9-17) capable of notifying the start-up state of the game control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
With
The game control means includes, as the start state, a general start state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and started, and A setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) for validating the setting,
The start notification unit performs the notification in a different manner in the general start state and the set start state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a setting change state, the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed. A part for displaying a message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily specify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, and thus it is possible to easily detect an illegality due to the setting. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 123SG,
The start notification unit is capable of executing various notifications according to the priority,
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-5, during the execution of the high priority setting value change notification, A part that does not execute low-priority RAM clear notification)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the notification of the setting activation state is given priority, so that it is possible to prevent an improper setting from being discovered.

Further, as means 3 of invention 123SG,
The start notification unit notifies the set start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (A part where the notification period when the device is started in the setting change state is 40 seconds). According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate notification in a period corresponding to the start state. .

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 123SG,
The activation notifying means,
A first notification unit (for example, the image display device 5), and a second notification unit (for example, the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification unit,
The setting notification state is notified by the first notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, a portion displaying a message image on the image display device 5),
The general start-up state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, a portion that executes light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R). According to this feature, the start notification is executed by different notification means, so that it is easy to recognize which start state is in effect.

Further, as means 5 of invention 123SG,
The game control means includes a game control by a common setting as a setting related to a game progress in a game possible state after the setting start state and a game possible state after the general start state. A game in which the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, and thereby, it is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect up to four times of fluctuation display). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience, such as the fact that the setting change has been recognized by executing the game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 124SG. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351, if the game information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value, the gaming machine or the game machine in which the gaming machine is installed may be lost. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the invention 124SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means is to be deleted (for example, a part where effect control CPU 120 executes a set value change confirmation notification process in Modification 122SG-1). When,
With
The game control means deletes at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, when the CPU 103 has the modification 122SG-1). A part for executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG.
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on a clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on a setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off a lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and
The setting unit can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-23 as the modified example 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the part in which the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1), the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N), and then executes the process of 122SGSa058. ),
The notification unit executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first setting value change start). (A part that executes a setting value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value.

Further, as means 2 of invention 124SG,
The game control means, after the setting change start operation is performed, if the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the game information stored in the game information storage means If the lock switch 122SG051 is not turned off after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), as shown in FIG. If it is determined, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the set value change process is terminated without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). Part)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by erasing game information even though a set value is not changed. be able to.

Further, as means 3 of invention 124SG,
The notifying unit can notify that the game information is not deleted by the game control unit when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modified example 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, a portion where message image 122 SG005M1 is displayed on image display device 5 when effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notifying process.
According to this feature, the gaming machine is characterized in that the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the gaming information from being erased, so that the gaming information is not intended. Erase can be further prevented.

Further, as means 4 of the invention 124SG,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the erasure condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification unit also performs the notification even when the erasing condition is satisfied (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, a message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5). part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Further, as means 5 of invention 124SG,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling effects based on control information output from the game control means;
Effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
Selecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasure in the effect control storage means;
With
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when it is selected by the selecting means not to execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. At least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in a modified example 122SG-3, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erasing condition is set when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Is satisfied, and when the erasing in the effect control storage unit is selected by the selection unit, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage unit is deleted. And at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-3, the RAM 1 Part to clear both the 2 and RAM122)
According to this feature, when the erasure condition is satisfied, whether or not to erase the effect control storage means together with the erasure in the game information storage means is described. Can be selected.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 122SG according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic part 122SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch is executed. When the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and an example in which a new set value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting change process is performed. RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be.

  As described above, when the RAM clearing process is executed based on the setting of the new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as the modified example 122SG-1, In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change times notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a). If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), the CPU 103 further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054a; N). 122SGSa054b). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

  If the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a set value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as the temporary set value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one step more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. The value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  If the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. The setting is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change process is terminated (122SGS061).

  On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the set value stored in the address F001 are used. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). If the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, a set value change end notification command is issued. The data is transmitted to the board 12 and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

  Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The processing is executed (122SGSa060). Note that the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. 9-13, and excludes the set values stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 (stored after the address F001). Clear data). After execution of the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060), a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change processing is ended (122SGS061).

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in Modification Example 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first setting value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). If the first setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410a; Y), A setting value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, and the lock is set when the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25 (A)).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). When the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processing of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

  Further, when the second setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value changing operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. When the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value designation command has not been received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). If the setting value designation command has been received (122SGS411b; Y), the process proceeds from the received setting value designation command. A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” corresponding to the set value). Is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, so that the clerk at the game hall or the like turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 in the pachinko game machine. When the device 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), the game display information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value in the image display device 5, or the set value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

  When the clerk of the game hall or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as described above, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is not changed and the RAM 102 is not cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". On the other hand, when the clerk of the game arcade turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is in a setting change state, and the display of the image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like inform that the setting value is being changed.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without setting a new setting value by the clerk of the game hall or the like in the setting change state, or when the clerk of the game hall sets the new setting value to the same value as the original setting value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared, as shown in FIG. 9D. Instead, a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3”. Further, in the setting change state, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, the set value is changed as shown in FIG. Is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial symbol.

  In the modified example 122SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 activates the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned ON, thereby changing the set value on the image display device 5. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this, and as illustrated in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, image display is performed by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a clearing switch turned on by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade. The game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a cold start in the device 5. That and that, if it does not start a pachinko game machine 1 at cold start an instruction to reboot the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

  In this way, for example, when a clerk at a game hall or the like accidentally turns on the clear switch to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 by hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up at a cold start. This prevents the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

  In the modified examples 122SG-1 and 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or started in a cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 or the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed to confirm whether or not to clear the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message image on the image display device 5. Whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state and / or started by cold start may be confirmed.

  In the modified example 122SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 activates the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned ON, thereby changing the set value on the image display device 5. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modified example 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start and that the set value has been changed. If the setting value is changed on the image display device 5 or the RAM 102 is cleared, A message image 122SG005M3 including a choice of whether to clear the RAM 122 in response to the change of the fixed value or the clearing of the RAM 102 is displayed, and the RAM 122 is cleared by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. The selection of whether or not may be accepted.

  When clearing of the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clearing process to clear other information except the set value information in the RAM 122 (results). If the clearing of the RAM 122 is not selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 is cleared).

  Also, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the same timing (a cold start notification command or setting for the effect control Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before transmitting the value change start notification command) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 122SG-4, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is started by cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control is performed. Timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, for example, by executing a RAM clearing process after transmitting the set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, after the end of the set value change. The timing for clearing the RAM 102 may be different between the case where the RAM 102 is started in the setting change state.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although the form in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify the fact (perform the RAM clear notification) is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 122SG-5, a pachinko game When the machine 1 is started in the setting change state to notify that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (to execute the notification during the change of the set value), each notification such as not executing the RAM clear notification is performed. , And when a high-priority notification (for example, notification of a change in the set value) is being performed, a low-priority notification (for example, a RAM clear notification) is issued. It may not be line.

  In the case where a priority is provided for each notification as described above, a low-priority notification may be executed after the execution of the high-priority notification. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the period for executing the notification is prevented from becoming long. You may.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not performed at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. At the time, a confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-described notification of RAM clear, notification of change of set value, notification of confirmation of set value, and various types of startup notifications. . In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or a cold start, a start notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the operation of confirming the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Can be performed.

  The operation of checking the movable body 32 may be performed from the time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, The effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Further, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the check operation of the movable body 32 from the point of receiving the set value change start notification command, that is, executes the check operation of the movable body 32 during the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 In such a case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the notification during the change of the set value is prioritized, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG of the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new setting value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by a hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the movable body 32 is checked. After slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, the confirmation operation that can be executed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is restarted, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, a confirmation that a relatively long period of time is required, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The operation may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the period required for the operation of checking the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear value is not cleared from the RAM 102. Specific information that is not performed may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the set value as the specific information that is not cleared in the RAM 102, the temporary set value, the game information, and the like as the information that is cleared is stored is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information such as set values which are not cleared, and the other RAM stores provisional set values and game information. Information to be cleared, such as information, may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary set values, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (RAM) is cleared. Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

  When two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Random Access Memory) connected to a backup battery is connected to a RAM for storing uncleared specific information such as set values. On the other hand, by setting the RAM in which the temporary setting values and game information are stored as FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), data having higher importance than other data such as setting values can be surely cleared. Alternatively, the information may be stored without being stored.

  Further, although the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be mounted on. By doing so, there is no need to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic portion 122SG, the mode in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to make it easy to execute a setting value changing operation.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 are provided on the main board 11 so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

  Also, in the characteristic section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the game place). The setting value 3 is set to be the most advantageous setting value for the game hall), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set as the set value 3 and the set value most advantageous to the player.

  In particular, in the feature section 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players may cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to improperly set the value 1 to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. 9A) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the setting value 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process when the RAM 102 has an abnormality or the like. It is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 perform the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although the form in which the image is displayed on the display device 5 or the like is different (the control relating to the notification at the time of starting is different) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the control related to the above-described notification at the time of startup, an initial symbol (see FIGS. 9-19), a background image, and a character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where a game can be played. (For example, the production mode and the production state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play) are different, and the movable body 32 is checked. Whether to execute the work, aspects and execution period of the confirmation operations may include control surrounding confirmation operation, such as different. In other words, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be any control as long as at least a part of the control target of the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like is different. .

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, Can be started, and a variable display result is derived on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, thereby ending one game and displaying the variable display derived on the image display device. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as “Setting is being changed” is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the effect control CPU 120 determining that the setting value change start notification command has been received. Thus, the effect of the setting change is notified by the effect control CPU 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these notifications are transmitted to the main board 11 (CPU 103). May be executed. In this case, a signal capable of specifying that the main board 11 is changing the setting is sent to an external management device such as a computer for managing a hole, for example, as information. Notification may be made to an external device by outputting from the terminal board, and further, the main board 11 (CPU 103) is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and lighting conditions such as indicators and lamps, it may be recognizable informed externally that is being set changes. For example, all the indicators and lamps connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between a setting change and other states (playable state), it is preferable to cause a display, a lamp, or the like connected to the main board 11 to emit light in a mode different from that during a normal game. .

  The main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify not only when the setting is being changed but also when the setting is being checked, or when the main board 11 is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display or the lighting state of the display or the lamp that is being used, the fact that the setting is being confirmed may be notified from the outside in a recognizable manner.

  As described above, the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, so that, for example, even for a model without the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed. Inside can be recognized from outside.

  When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp or LED for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked may be provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B connected to the main board 11 (CPU 103), and the normal symbol display are provided for the purpose of preventing an increase in cost due to the provision of these dedicated lamps and LEDs. The display mode of the device 20 is changed to a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (during variable display, during non-variable display (standby), during a jackpot game, and the like), for example, a blinking display and a special display pattern (special display). The notification may be made by lighting and displaying in FIG.

  In addition, when a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like is provided, in order to prevent a player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, for example, these lamps or LEDs may be used. An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the ordinary symbol display device 20.

  In the case of notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being checked, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in one notification mode (the same output signal). Alternatively, each of these states may be notified (notified to the outside) in an individual notification mode (different output signal) so that the state of each state can be specified from the outside.

  If the main board 11 (CPU 103) can notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed by lighting or blinking of a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like, the display control unit in the effect control board 12 The setting is being changed immediately by lighting / flashing of a dedicated lamp or LED without waiting for the rise of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5). It can be notified that there is something or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Description of feature portion 148SG in the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 148SG is a gaming machine capable of changing an effect that can be executed during the fluctuation display by an operation of the player. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, an interface area 148SG005I is displayed in the lower part of the center of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment. A lower left portion of the interface area 148SG005I is a first hold storage display area in which a hold display can be displayed so that the number of change storages (special figure hold storage) corresponding to the special figure game of the first special symbol can be specified. In the lower right part of the interface area 148SG005I, a hold display can be displayed so as to be able to specify the storage number of variable display (special figure storage number) corresponding to the special figure game of the second special symbol. It is set in the second hold storage display area. Furthermore, the upper part of the interface area 148SG005I is set as a normal timer effect execution area in which a normal timer effect described later can be executed.

  The control command transmitted from the relay board 15 to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. These effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp. 9 and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10A is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change A” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change B” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type to be "non-probable change" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, a command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first starting port winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the first reserved storage display area or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the second reserved storage display area or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for reporting the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination and the random number value MR4 for normal display result determination is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10B, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR4 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 148SG. In the characteristic part 148SG, among the cases in which the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the feature portion 148SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach production is performed in the feature portion 148SG is set to be shorter than the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. ing. Also, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the feature portion 148SG is executed, the variation pattern of the super-reach effect of the super-reach β is executed The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In addition, in the present feature part 148SG, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation degree is increased. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit. That is, in the present feature unit 148SG, when the fluctuation display result is "big hit", the super reach effect of the super reach α and the super reach β is executed at a higher ratio than the normal reach effect.

  In addition, in the present characteristic portion 148SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first by determining the types of the fluctuation patterns, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, and the type of super reach. After that, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the variation pattern to be executed is determined using only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern is determined. After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value of It may be determined variation pattern.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to a game control program, various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  FIG. 10D illustrates a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present characteristic portion 148SG, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

  The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is referred to as “big hit” to determine whether or not to control the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table of the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state (low-precision state), or the probable change state (high-accuracy state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”, “losing”, and “small hit”.

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination includes a result of determining whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. The special figure display result is “small hit”, which is the determination data assigned to the result of determining whether or not to control the small-big hit gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is in the probable state (high-probability state), a larger number of determination values than in the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) are "big hit" special figure display results. Assigned to. Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the “big hit” and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (the present embodiment). The feature of the form is about 1/30 for 148SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-precision state), the probability that it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state is determined. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so as to be higher.

  In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values are assigned to “small hits” regardless of the gaming state. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hitting game state as the "small hit" regardless of the gaming state is the same (approximately 1/200).

  FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the feature unit 148SG indicates that when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” and the big hit game state is controlled, the large hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not to make a decision. In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which the variable display (fluctuation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure (a special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special figure (the second special figure). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is “non-probable change”, “probable change big hit A”, “probable change big hit B” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

  Here, the big hit type in this feature portion 148SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5 (B). In this feature portion 148SG, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are performed as the big hit type after the end of the big hit game state. The probability variable big hit A and the probability variable big hit B which are executed and shift to the high-precision high-based state, and the non-probable variable big hit which shifts to the low-probability high-based state by executing only the time-saving control after the end of the big hit game state are set. I have.

  As described above, in the jackpot game state based on the “probable variable jackpot A” and the jackpot game state based on the “non-probable variable jackpot A”, 16 rounds of changing the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player (so-called “round”). 16 rounds), a jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state based on the “probable change jackpot B”, as described above, five rounds (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. It is a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where “probably big hit A” is referred to as a 16 round (16R) probability big hit and “probably big hit B” is called a 5 round (5R) positive big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big-hit jackpot A or the big-hit jackpot B have ended are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big-hit game state ends. Therefore, if the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot jackpot A or the jackpot jackpot B, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It is a so-called connected state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state due to the “non-probable big hit” is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the number of special figure games is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), “probable variable big hit A” and “probable variable big hit B” depend on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Are different in the assignment of judgment values to the jackpot types. In other words, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, a determination value in a predetermined range (a value in the range of “81” to “100”) is assigned to the big hit type of “probable big hit B” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable change big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “probable jackpot B” with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special map game using the second special map, it is not determined that the big hit type is “probably variable big hit B” and the state is controlled to the short open big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a gaming state in which game balls easily enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of a short-term open big hit state in which few prize balls are obtained, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It can be prevented.

  In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of “non-probable change” is based on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The probability of a non-probabilistic big hit and the probability of a probable big hit are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map. It has been.

  Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to “probably variable big hit B” differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Is also different depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probable variable big hit A" having a large number of rounds, the variation special figure is the second special figure. Is set to be more easily determined in the case of.

  It should be noted that, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special map is the first special map is assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. You may. For example, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a smaller determination value than when the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined with reference to the common table data regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  In the RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 148SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-6 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Have been. The game control data holding area 148SG150 shown in FIG. 10-6 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 148SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 148SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 148SG153, a game control counter setting unit 148SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 148SG155.

  The first special map reservation storage unit 148SG151A stores a special winning start (first starting winning) although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, but has not yet started. The game data (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 148SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and associates the hold number with the first start condition in passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 148SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables to determine whether or not a big hit occurs.

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred but has not yet started. The reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 148SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second start winning opening and associates the hold number with the second start condition for passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 148SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables to determine whether or not a big hit occurs.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit 148SG151C stores the hold information of the general figure game that has not yet been started by the ordinary symbol display 20, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit 148SG151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball, in association with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 148SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 148SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting section 148SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 148SG153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 148SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 148SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, effect control data holding as shown in FIG. An area 148SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 148SG190 shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 148SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 148SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 148SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194. Have.

  The effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 includes a plurality of types of effect operation states such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and a plurality of states whose states can be updated in response to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting part 148SG194. In the start prize receiving command buffer 148SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved special first reserved storages A corresponding area) and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during the variable display are provided. In the start winning winning reception command buffer 148SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved special second reserved storages is stored. ) And a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display. When there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category designation A command and a command for notifying the number of retained storages (a first notification command for the number of retained storages or a second notification command for the number of retained storages) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A include the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category designation command, A storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage in association with the reserved storage number notification command is secured.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest hold storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. The buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” for storing the contents of the hold storage satisfying the start condition is displayed in the variable display. Is completed in the decorative symbol change stop processing executed when the process is completed.

  At the time of starting winning in the first starting winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the receiving command buffer 148SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning in the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 148SG194A at the time of starting winning. Go. At the time of the start winning, a command from the starting opening winning designation command to the notification command of the number of retained storages is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the suffixes “1” to “4” of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol designation command, the fluctuation category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command.

  The command stored in the start prize receiving command buffer 148SG194A shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) has an entry (buffer) corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display completed immediately before every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The entry stored in the number “1-0” or “2-0” is deleted, and the entry (buffer number “1-1” or “2”) corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display to be started. -1), and the storage contents of the entries after the start of the variable display suspension storage are shifted. For example, in the case where the decorative display of the first special figure hold storage is changed in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and the buffer number “0” is deleted. Each command stored in “1” is shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”. Each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” and “4” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

  Next, an operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature part 148SG will be described. FIG. 10-8 is a part of a flowchart showing the rendering control process in the feature section 148SG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the above-described prefetch notice setting process, and then displays the hold memory display in the first hold memory display area and the second hold memory display area in the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A. A pending display update process is performed to update the display according to the stored contents. Then, any one of steps S170 to S177 is performed.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process in FIG. In variable display start setting processing, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (148SGS351). If the first variation start command reception flag is set (148SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are additionally stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (148SGS352). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because there is no destination to shift, so that the contents cannot be shifted.

  If the first change start command reception flag is not set in 148SGS351 (148SGS351; N), it is determined whether the second change start command reception flag is set (148SGS353). If the second change start command reception flag is not set (148SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second change start command reception flag is set (148SGS353; Y), start. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-0” to “2-4” of the second special figure hold storage in the prize receiving command buffer 148SG194A are higher by one buffer number at a time. (148SGS354). Note that the contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because there is no destination to shift, so that the contents cannot be shifted.

After the execution of 148SGS352 or 148SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (148SGS355).

  Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (148SGS356). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. I do.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, 3 symbols as a stop symbol. The combination (decorative symbol) of the decorative symbol whose symbol is "7" is determined. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, as the stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd-number symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, (A combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol).

  When the received variable display result designating command is the fifth variable display result designating command corresponding to the small hit, the combination of the decorative symbols having the predetermined rule except the combination of the big hits (the small hits) is used as the stop symbol. Designs: Combinations of "112", "223", etc., in which the "left" and "middle" decorative patterns are the same, but only the "right" decorative patterns are different, or continuous, such as "123" or "456" (Combination of numbers). When the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols different from the combination of the big hit and the small hit are not aligned as stop symbols. (Losing symbol) is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, a stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command read out in 148SGS355 is a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach (148SGS357). If the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command read out at 148SGS355 is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach or special hit (small hit) (148SGS357; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS367, where the fluctuation pattern specification command read at 148SGS355 is If the variation pattern shown is the variation pattern of the normal reach or the super reach (148SGS357; Y), based on the variation pattern and the variation display result, the presence or absence of the execution of the normal timer effect in the variation display and the presence or absence of the execution of the special timer effect Is determined (148SGS358).

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the normal timer effect is a normal timer effect for the timing at which the decorative pattern is a combination of reach in the normal timer effect execution area set above the interface area 148SG005I. (Starting the subtraction display of the value of the normal timer) to notify the reach. The normal timer is timer-out (timer value is “0”) at the timing when the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach. Further, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is displayed at the start timing of the super-reach reach effect.

  The special timer effect is to activate a special timer (start the subtraction display of the value of the special timer) in the timer image 148SG005T displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5 to execute a cut-in effect described later. This is an effect that notifies the timing. The special timer becomes timer-out (timer value is “0”) at the start timing of the cut-in effect. Further, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is displayed three seconds after the timer of the special timer expires.

  In the special timer effect in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment, a specific message is displayed based on the operation of the push button 31B while the special timer is operating, and the big hit gaming state is controlled by the displayed message. It is also an effect that executes a button operation effect that suggests a ratio.

  In the process of 148SGS358, as shown in FIG. 10A, if the variation pattern is normal reach and the variation display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the normal timer effect is not executed and the special timer effect is not executed. Is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 30%, and non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. Then, the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. If the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the fluctuation display result is lost, non-execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 90%, and execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined. Is determined at a rate of 10%, non-execution of a normal timer effect and execution of a special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of a normal timer effect and execution of a special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. I do.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), if the variation pattern is super reach and the variation display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the normal timer effect is not executed and the special timer effect is not executed. Determine at a rate of 10%, determine the execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect at a rate of 20%, and determine the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 40%. If the fluctuation pattern is super reach and the fluctuation display result is lost, the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined. Are determined at a rate of 30%, non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 10%. decide.

  In other words, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when attention is paid to the case where the fluctuation display is performed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the ratio of the normal timer effect to be controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) is as follows. Is set to be higher than the rate at which the normal timer effect is executed and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation degree in normal reach fluctuation display; normal timer effect execution> normal timer effect non-execution).

  In addition, when focusing on the case where the fluctuation display is performed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the ratio of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect not being executed when the timer effect is not executed being controlled to the big hit game state (big hit effect). Expectation degree) is low, so that the ratio controlled by the big hit gaming state increases in the order of executing only the normal timer effect, executing only the special timer effect, and executing both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. Set (Big hit expectation in the fluctuation display of super reach; Execute both normal timer effect and special timer effect> Execute only special timer effect> Execute only normal timer effect> Both normal timer effect and special timer effect Non-executed).

  After the execution of 148SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the normal timer effect (148SGS359). When the execution of the normal timer effect is determined (148SGS359; Y), the reach notification mode (the color of the numerical value displayed as the normal timer) in the normal timer effect is determined based on the fluctuation display result (148SGS360).

  In the process of 148SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 changes the color of the value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode to 10% when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. White characters are determined at a rate, blue characters are determined at a rate of 30%, and red characters are determined at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the color of the numerical value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode is determined to be white characters at a rate of 80%, blue characters at a rate of 15%, and 5% Determined in red by percentage.

  In other words, with respect to the normal timer effect in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (the big hit expectation) at which the normal timer is displayed in red in the normal timer effect execution area is controlled to the biggest hitting game state is high. When the normal timer is displayed in white characters in the normal timer effect execution area, the ratio of being controlled to the biggest hitting game state is set to be low (the expectation degree of the big hit for each reach notification mode (character color) in the normal timer effect) : Red letters> blue letters> white letters).

  After execution of 148SGS360, effect control CPU 120 sets a normal timer effect start waiting timer, and proceeds to 148SGS362 (148SGS361). If it is determined in the processing of 148SGS359 that non-execution of the normal timer effect has been determined (148SGS359; N), the processing proceeds to 148SGS362 without executing the processing of 148SGS360 and 148SGS361.

  In 148SGS362, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the special timer effect has been determined (148SGS362). When the execution of the special timer effect is determined (148SGS362; Y), the effect result of the button operation effect executed during the super-reach reach effect is determined based on the fluctuation display result (148SGS363), and the special timer effect start is awaited. The timer is set (148SGS364).

  In addition, in the process of 148SGS363, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the effect result of the button operation effect is “chance” at a rate of 30%. The display is determined, the display is determined to be "hot!" At a rate of 50%, and the display is determined to be "hot!" At a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the effect result of the button operation effect is determined to be “chance” display at a rate of 70%, and “hot!” Is determined at a rate of 25%, and 5%. Is determined to be displayed as "Super hot!"

  In other words, in the button operation effect in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the ratio in which the “big heat!” Display is performed on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B is controlled to the biggest hitting game state. (Big hit expectation) is high, and when the “chance!” Is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the rate of controlling to the big hit gaming state is set to be low (button operation effect). Expectation of big hit for each production result: "Intense hot!" Display> "Hot!" Display> "Chance!" Display).

  After execution of 148SGS364, effect control CPU 120 determines an effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect based on the fluctuation display result (148SGS364). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the execution of the cut-in effect A in which the character A is displayed is determined at a rate of 20%, and the character B is displayed. The cut-in effect B is executed at a rate of 80%. If the result of the variable display is a loss, the execution of the cut-in effect A is determined at a rate of 80% and the execution of the cut-in effect B is determined at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect, the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect. Is set to a high ratio (big hit expectation), which is controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation for each character displayed as a cut-in effect; display character B> display character A).

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, a form in which the character A or the character B can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more types of characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect may be provided.

  If it is determined in 148SGS362 that non-execution of the special timer effect has been determined (148SGS362; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS365 without executing 148SGS363 and 148SGS364.

  In 148SGS365, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect has been determined (148SGSG365). When it is determined that at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is to be executed (148SGS365; Y), the timer effect execution to be executed based on the combination of the timer effects whose execution is determined is suggested. The effect is determined (148SGS366), and the process proceeds to 148SGS367.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-13, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second timer effect is performed. The execution of the execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%. When only the execution of the special timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the second timer effect suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 60%. I do. Further, when both the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is performed by 90%. Determined in percentages.

  That is, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. It is set as follows.

  As described above, in the feature section 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect can be executed in both the normal reach fluctuation display and the super reach fluctuation display, while the special timer effect is displayed in the normal reach fluctuation display. Can be executed only in the super-reach fluctuation display in which the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is high (the jackpot expectation is high). The change display is a super-reach change display at a higher rate than when the effect execution suggestion effect is executed, that is, the big hit gaming state is at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Means controlled.

  The first timer effect execution suggestion effect refers to the operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display, or the start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the lapse of the operation reception period of the push button 31B. This is an effect to notify by displaying the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10C). The second timer effect suggestion effect is an operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display or the start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the lapse of the operation reception period of the push button 31B. This is an effect to notify by displaying the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-21 (D)).

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, while the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image larger than the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A, the color and shape, Although the message displayed in the image is the same (see FIGS. 10-21 (C) and 10-21 (D)), the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B may be images having at least a part different in size, color, shape, messages displayed in the image, and the like.

  If it is determined in 148SGS365 that both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are not to be executed (148SGS365; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS367 without executing the process of 148SGS366.

  In 148SGS367, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect, and the effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (148SGS368).

  The process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation section control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). I have.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, in 148SGS367, a process table is selected according to the presence / absence of a variation pattern and a cut-in effect, and a process table corresponding to the effect mode of the cut-in effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the decorative pattern and the cut-in effect can be performed using separate process tables. It may be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS369). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 to cause the image display device 5 to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control such that a decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner with a fluctuating pattern corresponding to the fluctuating pattern designation command on a one-to-one basis. May select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (148SGS370). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (148SGS371). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data in the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby the variation of the decorative design is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172) (148SGS372).

  FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed as the variable display effect process illustrated in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the values of the process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer by -1 (148SGS401, 148SGS402, 148SGS403), and determines whether or not the process timer has expired. (148SGS404). When the process timer expires (148SGS404; Y), the process data is switched (148SGS405). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer value in the process table to the process timer (148SGS406). Further, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. which are set next (148SGS407), and proceeds to 148SGS409.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS404, when the process timer has expired (148SGS404; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (148SGS408), and the process proceeds to 148SGS409.

  In 148 SGS 409, effect control CPU 120 executes a timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process (148 SGS 409), and determines whether a normal timer effect start waiting timer or a normal timer effect process timer to be described later is operating (148 SGS 410). ). When the normal timer effect start waiting timer or the normal timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS410; Y), after executing the normal timer effect execution process (148SGS411), the process proceeds to 148SGS412. When neither the normal timer effect start waiting timer nor the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS410; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS412 without executing the process of 148SGS411.

  In 148SGS412, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a special timer effect start waiting timer or a special timer effect process timer to be described later is in operation (148SGS412). If the special timer effect start waiting timer or the special timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS412; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS414 after executing the special timer effect execution processing (148SGS413). When neither the special timer effect start waiting timer nor the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS412; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS414 without executing the process of 148SGS413.

  In 148SGS414, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the timing to hide the interface area 148SG005I, that is, whether or not it is the timing through the super-reach reach effect (148SGS414). If it is the timing to hide the interface area 148SG005I (148SGS414; Y), the interface area 148SGS005I is hidden in the image display device 5 (148SGS415), and the process proceeds to 148SGS416. If the timing is not the non-display timing of the interface area 148SGS005I (148SGS414; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS416 without executing the processing of 148SGS415.

  In 148SGS416, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation control timer has expired (148SGS416). If the fluctuation control timer is out (148SGS416; Y), the next display screen of the decorative symbol is created and written in the VRAM (148SGS417), the fluctuation control timer is reset, and the process proceeds to 148SGS419 (148SGS418).

  If the fluctuation control timer has not expired (148SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 148SG419 without executing the processes of 148SGS417 and 148SGS418.

  In 148 SGS 419, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable time timer has expired (148 SGS 419). If the variable time timer has not expired (148SGS419; N), it is further determined whether or not the fixed command reception flag is set (148SGS420). When the confirmation command reception flag is set (148SGS420; Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is not displayed, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed again on the image display device 5 (148SGS421), and the effect control process flag is set. Then, a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change stop processing is set (148SGS421), and the variable display effect processing ends. If the confirmed command reception flag is not set (148SGS420; N), the variable display effect processing ends without executing the processing of 148SGS421 and 148SGS422.

  In 148SGS419, even when the variable time timer is out (148SGS419: Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is not displayed, the interface area 148SG005I is re-displayed on the image display device 5 and (148SGS421). ), A value corresponding to the decoration symbol change stop processing is set to the effect control process flag (148SGS421), and the variable display effect processing ends.

  FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is operating (148SGS431). If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is in operation (148SGS431; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS443. If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is not operating (148SGS431; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is further executed. Is determined (148SGS432).

  If the execution of the timer effect execution suggestion effect has not been determined (148SGS432; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends, and if the execution of the timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS432; Y), With reference to the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not it is time to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B (148SGS433). When it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; Y), the display of the push button operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is started on the image display device 5 (148SGS434). , 148SGS435. If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS435 without executing the process of 148SGS434.

  In 148SGS435, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation acceptance period of push button 31B is being received (148SGS435). If it is not during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (148SGS435; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended. If it is during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (148SGS435; Y), the operation of the push button 31B is further stopped. It is determined whether an operation has been detected (148SGS436).

  When the operation of the push button 31B is not detected (148SGS436; N), the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether or not it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B based on the process data being executed (148SGS437). ). If it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended. If it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS438. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the 148SGS436 (148SGS436; Y), the process proceeds to the 148SGS438 without executing the process of the 148SGS437.

  In 148SGS438, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS438). If the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS438; Y), the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table corresponding to the timer effect whose execution is determined is set (148SGS439), and 148SGS441. Proceed to. If the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS438; N), the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table corresponding to the timer effect whose execution is determined is set (148SGS440). , 148SGS441.

  The first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A, which is set when execution of only the normal timer effect is determined, and a special timer effect execution effect process table A in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment. The first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B that is set when execution of only the timer effect is determined, and the first timer effect that is set when execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined The one-timer effect execution suggestion effect process table C is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

  Further, as the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A which is set when execution of only the normal timer effect is determined. The second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B, which is set when execution of only the special timer effect is determined, is set when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined. The second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table C is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

  Then, in 148SGS441, the effect control CPU 120 starts the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer in the process data 1 of the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table set in 148SGS439 or 148SGS440 (148SGS441).

  The timer effect execution suggestion effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc., are time-series in association with each process data n (1 to N). Are arranged in order.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5 controls the various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, etc.) (148SGS442), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution processing. To end.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS443, effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer by 1 (148SGS443), and determines whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer has expired (148SGS444). If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer has expired (148SGS444; Y), it is further determined whether the timer effected timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer ( 148 SGS 445).

  If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer that has expired is not the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148SGS445; N), the process data is switched (148SGS446). That is, the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is newly started by setting the next set process timer value in the set timer effect execution suggestion effect process table in the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148SGS447). ). Further, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like which are set next (148SGS448), and proceeds to 148SGS450.

  When the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer that has been out of the timer is the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148SGS445; Y), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is terminated (148SGS456), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution is performed. The process ends.

  If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer has not expired in 148SGS444 (148SGS444; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect device (effect) in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer. 148SGS449), and the process proceeds to 148SGS450.

  In 148SGS450, effect control CPU 120 refers to whether or not the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is based on the process data being executed (148SGS450). If it is not during the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect (148SGS450; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends, and the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is in progress. In the case (148SGS450; Y), it is determined whether or not only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined, that is, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A is set. It is determined whether or not there is (148SGS451).

  If only the execution of the normal timer effect has been determined (148SGS451; Y), the period of the normal timer effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS452), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution processing ends. If the execution of the normal timer effect has not been determined or the execution of the special timer effect has also been determined (148SGS451; N), whether or not the execution of only the special timer effect has been determined, that is, the first timer effect has been determined. It is determined whether the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B is set (148SGS453).

  If execution of only the special timer effect has been determined (148SGS453; Y), the special timer effect period is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS454), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends.

  Further, when the execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined (148SGS453; N), the image display device 5 displays the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect. (148SGS455), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends.

  FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the normal timer effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the normal timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS461). When the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS461; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS468, and when the normal timer effect process timer is not operating (148SGS461; N), the value of the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer is set to -1. Then, it is determined whether the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer has expired (148SGS463).

  If the normal timer effect execution wait timer has not expired (148SGS463; N), the normal timer effect execution process is terminated. If the normal timer effect execution wait timer has expired (148SGS463; Y), the normal timer has expired. An effect process table is set (148SGS464). Then, the normal timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set normal timer effect process table is started (148SGS465).

  The normal timer effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like, are associated with each of the process data n (1 to N) in a time series order. Are arranged.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS466). For example, the operation of the normal timer is started in the interface area 148SG005I displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS467), and the normal timer effect execution processing ends.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS468, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the normal timer effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS468). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal timer effect process timer has expired (148SGS469). When the normal timer effect process timer is out of the timer (148SGS469; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (148SGS470).

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (148SGS470; Y), it is determined whether or not the timer-out is the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS471). If it is the last normal timer effect process timer that has expired (148SGS471; Y), the normal timer effect is terminated and the normal timer effect execution processing is terminated (148SGS479). The end of the normal timer effect indicates that the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I ends. If the timer-out is not the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS471; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

  When the variation pattern of the variation display is the variation pattern of the super reach in 148SGS470 (148SGS470; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timer-out is the last normal timer effect process timer. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the super-reach effect start timing (148SGS472). If it is the last normal timer effect process timer that has expired (148SGS472; Y), the normal timer effect is terminated and the normal timer effect execution processing is terminated (148SGS479). If the timer-out is not the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS472; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

  In 148SGS473, effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (148SGS473). That is, the normal timer effect process timer is newly started by setting the next set process timer value in the normal timer effect process table as the normal timer effect process timer (148SGS474). In addition, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like which are set next (148SGS475), and proceeds to 148SGS477.

  If it is determined in 148SGS469 that the normal timer effect process timer has not expired (148SGS469; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect of the effect device (effect effect) in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the normal timer effect process timer. (148SGS476), and the process proceeds to 148SGS477.

  In 148SGS477, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timing at which the display of the normal timer in interface area 148SG005I changes to the reach notification mode, that is, whether or not it is the timer out timing of the normal timer in the normal timer effect. (148SGS477). If the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I is not at the timing of changing to the reach notification mode (148SGS477; N), the normal timer effect execution processing is terminated, and the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I changes to the reach notification mode. If there is (148SGS477; Y), the display of the normal timer is changed to the reach notification mode in the character color determined in the variable display start setting process 148SGS360 (see FIG. 10-9) (148SGS478), and the normal timer effect The execution process ends.

  FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the special timer effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the special timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS481). When the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS481; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS488, and when the special timer effect process timer is not operating (148SGS481; N), the value of the special timer effect execution start wait timer is set to -1. Then, it is determined whether or not the special timer effect execution start waiting timer has expired (148SGS483).

  If the special timer effect execution wait timer has not expired (148SGS483; N), the special timer effect execution process ends, and if the special timer effect execution wait timer has expired (148SGS483; Y), the special timer An effect process table is set (148SGS484). Then, the special timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set special timer effect process table is started (148SGS485).

  The special timer effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like, are associated with each of the process data n (1 to N) in a time series order. Are arranged.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the apparatus 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS486). For example, a special timer effect timer image 148SG005T (see FIG. 10-23 (B)) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special timer operation is started in the timer image 148SG005T (148SGS487), and the special timer effect is performed. The execution process ends.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS488, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the special timer effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS488). Then, it is determined whether or not the special timer effect process timer has expired (148SGS489). If the special timer effect process timer is out of timer (148SGS489; Y), it is determined whether or not the timer out is the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490). If the timer is out of the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490; Y), the timer image 148SG005T is hidden from the image display device 5, the special timer effect ends, and the special timer effect execution processing ends. (148SGS496).

  If the timer-out is not the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490; N), the process data is switched (148SGS491). That is, the special timer effect process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer value in the special timer effect process table as the special timer effect process timer (148SGS492). In addition, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like which are set next (148SGS493), and proceeds to 148SGS495.

  If it is determined in 148SGS489 that the special timer effect process timer has not expired (148SGS489; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect of the effect device (effect effect) in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the special timer effect process timer. (148SGS494), and the process proceeds to 148SGS495.

  Then, effect control CPU 120 executes the button operation effect execution process for executing the button operation effect in 148SGS495, and ends the special timer effect execution process.

  FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the button operation effect execution process in FIG. 10-17. In the button operation effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS501). If the button operation effect process timer is in operation (148SGS501; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS510. If the button operation effect process timer is not in operation (148SGS501; N), it is time to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B. Is determined (148SGS502).

  When it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS502; Y), the display of the push button operation promotion image 148SG005P (refer to FIG. 10-23 (E)) is started on the image display device 5 so that the player is displayed. Prompts the operation of the push button 31B (148SGS503), and proceeds to 148SGS504. If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS502; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS504 without executing the process of 148SGS503.

  In 148SGS504, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation acceptance period of push button 31B is being accepted (148SGS504). If the operation of the push button 31B is being accepted (148SGS504; Y), it is further determined whether or not the pushbutton 31B is operated (148SGS505). If there is no operation of the push button 31B (148SGS505; N), it is determined whether or not it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506). If it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; N), the button operation effect execution processing is ended. If it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS507.

  When the push button 31B is operated in the 148SGS505 (148SGS505; Y), the process proceeds to the 148SGS507 without executing the process of the 148SGS506.

  Then, in 148SGS507, the effect control CPU 120 starts the button operation effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set button operation effect process table (148SGS508).

  The button operation effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like, are associated with each of the process data n (1 to N) in a time series order. Are arranged.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, the various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS509). For example, the display of the result of the button operation effect on the image display device 5 is started, and the button operation effect execution process ends.

  Further, in 148SGS510, effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the button operation effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS510). Then, it is determined whether or not the button operation effect process timer has expired (148SGS511).

  If the button operation effect process timer has expired (148SGS511; Y), it is further determined whether the button operation effect process timer that has expired is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512). When the button operation effect process timer that has been out of the timer is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; Y), the display of the effect operation result of the button operation effect on the image display device 5 is ended to end the button operation effect process. Then (148SGS517), the button operation effect execution processing ends.

  If the button operation effect process timer that has expired is not the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; N), the process data is switched (148SGS513). That is, by setting the next set process timer value in the set button operation effect process table in the button operation effect process timer, the button operation effect process timer is started again (148SGS514). In addition, the control unit (148SGS515) controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like that are set next, and ends the button operation effect execution process.

  If the button operation effect process timer has not expired in 148SGS511 (148SGS511; N), the effect device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the button operation effect process timer (148SGS516), and the button sosua effect effect execution processing is performed. finish.

  As described above, by executing the normal timer effect execution process and the special timer effect execution process, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when executing only the normal timer effect in the variation display of the variation pattern of the normal reach, As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds from the change start timing. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the timing at which the normal timer times out), the display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the timing of the end of the fluctuation. I have.

  When only the normal timer effect is performed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden in the image display device 5 from the fluctuation start timing to the fluctuation end timing. That is, in the fluctuation display of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the interface area 148SG005I is always displayed on the image display device 5.

  When only the normal timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds from the fluctuation start timing, as shown in FIG. . Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. The display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (timing when the normal timer times out) to the start timing of the super-reach reach effect. It has become.

  In the case where only the normal timer effect is executed in the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the variation start timing to the start timing of the reach reach of the super reach. The interface area 148SG005I is not displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach to the end timing of the variable display.

  That is, in the case where only the normal timer effect of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is executed in the change display of the characteristic portion 148SG in the present embodiment, the change display is performed in the super reach change pattern as described above. Is controlled to a jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the fluctuation display is executed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern (big hit expectation for each fluctuation pattern; super reach> normal reach), and the super reach fluctuation pattern When the fluctuation display is executed, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the super-reach reach effect, while when the fluctuation display is executed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed. Since the non-display is not performed, when the interface area 148SG005I is non-displayed during the variable display, the big hit game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not non-displayed during the variable display. Has become.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display, the jackpot game state is set at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display. The control mode is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the dynamic display. May be controlled to a bigger hit gaming state at a higher rate than in the case of

  Further, in the case of executing only the special timer effect of the short timer effect and the special timer effect in the fluctuation display in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed over a period of seconds. Next, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the special timer is operated on the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the fact that the special timer has timed out. Note that the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display is terminated) 3 seconds after the timer of the special timer (start timing of the cut-in effect).

  When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), the timer effect is performed for 10 seconds from the fluctuation start timing. Perform the execution suggestion effect. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I for 15 seconds. The display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (timing when the normal timer times out) to the start timing of the super-reach reach effect. It has become.

  Note that the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing of the fluctuation to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, while the image display is performed from the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach to the end timing of the fluctuation display. In the device 5, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden.

  In addition, in the fluctuation display, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the special timer is operated with the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the fact that the special timer has timed out. Note that the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display is terminated) 3 seconds after the timer of the special timer (start timing of the cut-in effect).

  In the case where the special timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (A) and 10-20 (B), 10 minutes from the timing 35 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Button operation effects are also executed over a period of seconds. For this reason, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, even during the special timer effect in which the operation period of the timer is longer than the normal timer effect, the player performs the button operation effect in parallel so that the player can use the image display device 5. Attention can be paid to the display continuously, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment interest from being reduced.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which a button operation effect is not executed even during a special timer effect, or a button operation effect is executed during a normal timer effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, when executing only the normal timer effect, after performing the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect for 5 seconds, A normal timer effect is executed 5 seconds after the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect, that is, a period of 5 seconds is provided from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the normal timer effect (effect) In the case where only the special timer effect is executed, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed for 7 seconds, and then the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. The special timer effect is executed 3 seconds after the end, that is, a 3 second period is set from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the special timer effect. When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are performed for 10 seconds. After the execution, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed from the end timing of the timer effect execution suggestion effect (the effect start waiting period is 0 second).

  As described above, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect differs depending on which timer effect is executed. In particular, when the special timer effect is executed, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is set longer than when only the normal timer effect is executed. That is, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the special timer effect having the effect period longer than the normal timer effect is determined, it is longer than when the execution of only the normal timer effect is determined. , The execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed.

  Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in a case where the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is executed during the variable display in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24. .

  First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 (A) and 10-21 (B), when the variable display is started in a state in which the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 starts. Displays the operation promotion image 148SG005P.

  When the player operates the push button 31B while the operation promoting image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, as illustrated in FIG. Displaying the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A on the image display device 5 as the first timer effect execution suggestion effect, or the image display device as the second timer effect execution suggestion effect as shown in FIG. In 5, the display of the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is executed.

  Next, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined in the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-22 (B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or After the normal timer effect period (15 seconds, which is the period up to reach) is notified in the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started as a normal timer effect in the interface area 148SG005I.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C), when the normal timer times out at the timing when the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach, the display of the normal timer is displayed in any one of white, blue, and red colors. Change to reach notification mode.

  Further, after reaching the reach, if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (D), the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination of a loss or a big hit. At this time, the display of the interface area 148SG005I is continued without being hidden in the image display device 5.

  When only the execution of the special timer effect is determined in the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 (A) and 10-23 (B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the After the special timer effect period (45 seconds or 55 seconds, which is the period until the decorative symbol is derived and displayed) is notified in the two-timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the timer image 148SG005T is displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5. The display is started, and the operation of the special timer is started during the timer image 148SG005T as a special timer effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-23 (C) through 10-23 (F), during execution of the special timer effect, the operation of the special timer is continued during the timer image 148SG005T, and the super-reach reach effect is performed. After the start, the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the right part of the image display device 5 as a part of the button operation effect. As shown in FIG. 10D, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden from the image display device 5 at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

  Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the reach effect of the super reach, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B has elapsed, the effect result of the button operation effect on the right part of the image display device 5 Is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (G), the chance-up effect is started at the timing when the special timer expires, and the timer image 148SG005T is hidden three seconds after the start of the chance-up effect. Is done.

  When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined to be executed in the variable display, the first timer effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-24 (A) and 10-24 (B). After the total value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period is reported in the suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started as a normal timer effect in the interface area 148SG005I. At the same time, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started at the lower right of the image display device 5, and the operation of the special timer is started during the timer image 148SG005T as a special timer effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10C, when the normal timer times out at the timing when the decorative pattern becomes a combination of reach, the display of the normal timer is displayed in any one of white, blue, and red. Change to reach notification mode. After reaching the reach, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, in FIGS. 10-24 (D) to 10-24 (G), the button operation effects are executed as in FIGS. 10-23 (D) to 10-23 (G), and the special timer is set to the timer. The chance-up production starts from the timing of the out. Also, three seconds after the start of the chance-up effect, the timer image 148SG005T is hidden.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the image display device 5 can display the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer and the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer, and also display the interface area during the variable display. When the 148SG005I is hidden, the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate during the variable display than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden. Therefore, it is determined whether the interface area 148SG005I is hidden. The player can be noticed, so that the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, after the end of the normal timer effect, the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer is hidden at the start timing of the super-reach reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer may be displayed at a timing other than the timing at which the reach effect of the super-reach is started if the fluctuation display is performed after the end of the normal timer effect. It may be hidden.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the ratio of controlling only the special timer effect to the big hit game state by executing only the normal timer effect is set to be higher than the ratio of controlling to the big hit game state by executing only the normal timer effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the timer effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect. Even during the execution period of the special timer effect in which the effect period is longer than the effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the monotonous game by executing the button operation effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-13, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the special timer effect is performed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Is executed and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the bigger hit gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to which of the execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-24, in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period. When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect can be notified, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the characteristic part 148SG of the embodiment, when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the period of the normal timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is performed. And a form in which the total value of the periods of the special timer effects is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when performing both the normal timer effects and the special timer effects, In the one-timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, only one of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period may be notified.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when executing the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are performed. Also, at the previous timing, the operation prompting image 148SG005P for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5, and based on the operation of the push button 31B, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second Since the two-timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the player can pay attention to which of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed after the push button 31B is operated. , Can improve the entertainment interest.

  In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the values of the normal timer and the special timer are subtracted toward 0 is illustrated as the predetermined operation in the present invention of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined operation of the present invention may be to add a value of a normal timer or a special timer toward a specific value.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, a normal timer effect and a special timer effect are exemplified as the predetermined effects in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the predetermined effects in the present invention are not limited to these. For example, the display amount of a predetermined meter or gauge may be increased or decreased.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are illustrated as the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are performed by combining effects having different operation modes and different effect modes (for example, the first predetermined effect is an effect in which the value of a timer is added, and the second predetermined effect is a second predetermined effect. The effect may be to reduce the display amount of the meter).

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the operation promoting image 148SG005P having the same mode is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed and when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and differs between the case where the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed and the case where the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. The operation promotion image 148SG005P of the mode may be displayed on the image display device 5. In this manner, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution effect effect is executed according to the mode of the displayed operation promotion image 148SG005P. , Can improve the entertainment interest.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are always executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B. Although the form in which the timer effect or the special timer effect is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the push button 31B is operated, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect is produced. A case may be provided in which the execution suggestion effect is not executed and the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is not started.

  As the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer, a special timer, and the like. For the timer image 148SG005T including the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the total value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period, and the like, the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect. Since the notification can be made in the execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the game entertainment can be improved.

  In particular, as the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, the normal timer effect period is applied to only one of the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer. And the special timer effect period can be notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, so that the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are produced. The player can pay attention to the interface area 148SG005I and the timer image 148SG005T, which are the target, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 148SG of the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the special timer effect is executed for the cut-in effect that is the effect during the super-reach reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 148SG-1, a special timer effect may be executable for an effect to be executed before the start of the super-reach reach effect. In this case, when the special timer effect can be executed for the effect to be performed before the start of the super-reach reach effect, the special timer effect is executed for the effect to be executed before the start of the super-reach reach effect. When performing, that is, when the special timer effect is executed while the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is being displayed (during the execution of the normal timer effect), and the effect (cut-in effect, etc.) executed during the super-reach reach effect , The rate controlled in the big hit game state is different between the case where the special timer effect is executed, that is, the case where the special timer effect when the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is hidden is executed. (For example, Super Li When the special timer effect is executed for the effect that is executed during the reach effect of the super reach, the control is set to the big hit game state than when the special timer effect is executed for the effect that is executed before the start of the super reach reach effect. May be higher). By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the special timer effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed during the variable display is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An addition effect of adding the value of a timer operating as an effect may be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A) to 10-25 (D) as a modified example 155SG-1, the image display device is operated during a period in which the timer is operating as a normal timer effect or a special timer effect. 5 displays an operation promotion image 148SG005P that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, after displaying the addition notification image 148SG005C indicating the value to be added to the operating timer on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the timer indicating the value indicated in the addition notification image 148SG005C is operated. (A special timer in the present modified example 155SG-1).

  In addition, in the modified example 155SG-1, the form in which the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the special timer is operating, it may be executed based on a trigger other than the operation of the push button 31B.

  In addition, in the modified example 155SG-1, the form in which the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C is added as the value of the special timer as the addition effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition effect is not limited thereto. The value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C may be added as the value of the normal timer, or may be added as the value of both the normal timer and the special timer.

  Also, in the modified example 155SG-1, the mode in which the operation promoting image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect and the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect executed based on the operation of the push button 31B during the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may be an effect other than the addition effect. Further, a plurality of operation reception periods of the push button 31B during the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect may be provided, and different effects may be executed based on the reception of the operation of the push button 31B in each operation reception period. . Furthermore, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed from the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the one-timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect may be executed from different timings.

  Specifically, as a modified example 155SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (G), for example, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect is produced at the same timing as the characteristic portion 148SG. During the execution of the normal timer effect after execution (during the operation of the normal timer), the operation prompting image 148SG005P for prompting the first operation of the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation of the first push button 31B is performed. The addition effect is executed based on the.

  Then, after the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C is added to the value of the short timer by executing the addition effect (displaying the addition notification image 148SG005C on the image display device 5), the second push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5. A push button operation promotion image 149SG005P for prompting an operation is displayed, and a second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a second timer effect execution suggestion effect based on the second operation of the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to start a special timer production. In this way, by enabling the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect to be executed at different timings, it is possible to determine at what timing the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. The player can be noticed, and the entertainment interest in the game can be improved.

  In the modified example 155SG-2, the form in which the execution timing of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is different from the execution timing of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a plurality of timings at which at least one of the effect production suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect can be executed, a timer effect execution suggestion effect (and a normal timer effect or special It may be possible to make the player pay attention to whether the timer effect is executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above embodiment, the period from the start of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is constant (10 Second Embodiment), the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 155SG-3, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect after the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Is different from the period from when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed to the time when the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is executed, so that the game becomes monotonous. May be prevented.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, Can be started, and the variation display result is derived on a display device capable of varying display of a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, whereby one game is ended, and the variation display result derived on the display device becomes The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated accordingly.

  When the gaming machine is a slot machine in this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (D) as a modified example 156SG-1, for example, the player instructs the slot machine. By operating the stop switch corresponding to each reel according to the above, the number of remaining games of the ART is displayed on the image display device during the ART in which the reel stops in a combination such as a bell or a replay. Further, during the additional zone in which the number of remaining games in the ART during the ART is added, the number of remaining games in the additional zone is also displayed on the image display device.

  When the remaining number of games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone are displayed on the image display device as described above, if a specific role (for example, a rare role such as cherry or watermelon) is won, the reel stops. The additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device as an additional notification effect based on the information.

  Then, after the additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device, the number of additional games indicated by the additional notification image 148SG005M may be added to both the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed during the variable display is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (D), a part of the displayed timer (a part of the normal timer in the modification 156SG-2) is moved by the movable body 32 for a predetermined period. A concealment effect of concealing from a player may be executed over a period of time. When the concealment effect is performed in this manner, the concealment is released at least at a timing before the timing at which the normal timer expires. That is, the normal timer is hidden while a part of the normal timer is concealed by the movable body 32. , The normal timer effect and the concealment effect can be suitably executed.

  Although the modification 156SG-2 illustrates an example in which a part of the normal timer is hidden by the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the special timer is movable. It may be hidden by the body 32. Further, not only the part of the normal timer and the special timer that is concealed by the movable body 32 but also the entirety of the normal timer and the special timer may be concealed by the movable body 32.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect is decorated and executed for the timing at which the symbol is a combination of reach and the special timer effect is executed for the cut-in effect execution timing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect may be other than the timing at which these decorative symbols are combined with the reach and the execution timing of the cut-in effect. For example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the start timing of the special timer effect, and the special timer effect may be executed for the timing at which the decorative design is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss. By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the execution of the special timer effect having a high jackpot expectation by executing the normal timer effect having a low jackpot expectation. Can be improved.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed during the variable display for executing the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is a variable display prior to a normal timer effect or a special timer effect variable display. May be executed over a plurality of variable displays. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect over the plurality of variable displays, so that interest can be improved.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above embodiment, when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed, an example in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are reliably executed is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may not be executed. Good.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the normal timer and the special timer are hidden from the image display device 5 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing at which the normal timer and the special timer are hidden from the image display device 5 may be the same. By doing so, for example, the player can pay attention to an important effect indicating whether or not a fluctuation display result such as a super-reach reach effect is a big hit, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are started from the timing when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are finished. The present invention is not limited to this. For the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion are completed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 second to 0.5 second). (10 seconds) later. By doing in this way, the player can pay attention to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect during the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. Can be improved.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed during the variable display is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The special timer effect may be executed as an effect other than during fluctuation display such as during a big hit game. For example, when it is possible to execute a normal timer effect or a special timer effect during a jackpot game, the effect of notifying that the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is controlled to a positively changing game state after the end of the jackpot game, The effect of notifying that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot may be executed.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the value of each timer is subtracted toward 0 as a normal timer effect or a special timer effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, an effect of stopping the value of each timer for a certain period (freeze effect) may be made executable. When the freeze effect can be executed in this way, by providing a case where a part of the value of each timer is concealed by the movable body 32 as shown in the modified example 156SG-2, The player may be allowed to pay more attention to whether the effect targeted by the effect is executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pachinko game machine A display device different from the image display device 5 may be separately provided in the display device 1 so that the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed on the display device. By doing so, a special feeling can be given to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, and an area for displaying another effect on the image display device 5 can be secured. The production effect in the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above embodiment, at least a part of the execution period of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is overlapped, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timer effect and the special timer effect may be executed such that there is no overlapping period. In such a case, for example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the special timer effect, that is, the special timer may be activated when the normal timer expires.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the ratio of controlling the big hit game state according to the execution / non-execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is different is illustrated. By executing the normal timer effect on the target, the normal timer effect may simply be an effect indicating the execution of another effect, and may not be related to the ratio controlled in the big hit game state.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the embodiment, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer can be displayed on the image display device 5, and whether or not the interface area 148SG005I is hidden is displayed. Although the form in which the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is different according to the present invention is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a timer image including a special timer with a different target effect is displayed as an image. A plurality of timer images can be displayed on the device 5 (for example, three timer images are displayed on the image display device 5, and the first timer image (first special timer) is the first pseudo continuous production, and the second timer image is displayed). In the (second special timer), the second pseudo continuous production, the third timer image (the third Shall timer) as the target of the reach demonstration of super reach in) may be operating each special timer. Further, when a plurality of timer images 148SG005T can be displayed as described above, the rate of controlling the big hit game state may be changed according to the number of displayed timer images 148SG005T.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (the characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12), and the main substrate 11 ( The CPU 103) can set any one of a plurality of set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stores a set secret value obtained by converting the set value in the RAM 102, and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Side can execute a suggestion effect (a morning background effect) indicating the set value (characteristic 122SG in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27). Although the form in which the timer effect can be executed (the characteristic portion 148SG in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-28) has been disclosed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes one of these characteristic portions. It may be applied to features of the number.

  For example, in a case where the characteristic portion 122SG and the characteristic portion 148SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a normal timer effect and a special timer effect, and effects related to the normal timer effect and the special timer effect (button operation effect, cut-in effect, etc.) , A timer effect execution suggestion effect, or the like, or the determination ratio of each effect mode may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-23222. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-23222, the player cannot pay attention to the first predetermined display or the second predetermined display after the specific mode is set, and the gaming interest is improved. There is a problem that can not be. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of invention 148SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Image display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying an image,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect or a cut-in effect) indicating that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, and use a predetermined display (for example, a normal timer or a special timer) displayed on the image display means. A predetermined operation (for example, an operation of subtracting the value of the normal timer or the special timer) is performed and the display mode of the predetermined display is set to a specific mode (for example, the normal timer or the special timer is timer-out (the values of the normal timer or the special timer are set to 0). Effect) means (for example, a variable display shown in FIG. 10-14) in which a predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect) can be executed in response to the execution of the suggestion effect. The part that executes the middle production process),
With
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer),
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled is different between the case where the second predetermined display is not displayed and the case where the second predetermined display is not displayed (for example, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display). If this is done, the portion that is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display)
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is non-displayed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Further, as means 2 of invention 148SG,
When the second predetermined display is not displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the second predetermined display is not displayed (for example, the interface area 148SG005I is not displayed during the variable display). If this is done, the portion that is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display)
According to this feature, the gaming machine can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is hidden, so that the gaming interest can be improved. .

Further, as means 3 of invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using the first predetermined display when the second predetermined display is non-display is controlled to be more advantageous than the predetermined effect using the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display. (For example, as shown in the modified example 148SG-1, when the special timer effect is executed for the effect to be executed during the super-reach reach effect, the execution is performed before the start of the super-reach reach effect. (The part where the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the special timer effect is executed for the effect
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make a player pay attention to an effect mode of a predetermined effect using the first predetermined display.

Further, as means 4 of invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using only the first predetermined display has a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the predetermined effect using only the second predetermined display (for example, a big hit by executing only the special timer effect). (The part where the ratio controlled in the gaming state is set higher than the ratio controlled in the big hit gaming state by executing only the normal timer effect)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, a player can be noticed with respect to an effect mode of a predetermined effect.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 148SG,
An operation detecting means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation;
The effect performing means is capable of executing an action corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on a detection result of the operation detecting means,
In the first predetermined display, a first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer effect until the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach) elapses as the predetermined effect. It is a display that becomes the specific mode when doing,
In the second predetermined display, the cut-in effect is started from the start of the special timer effect as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), as the predetermined effect is a second period longer than the first period. 45 seconds or 55 seconds until the specified time has elapsed) is a display in the specific mode,
During the second period, the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher than in the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect). Is executed, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest during a predetermined effect.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2017-79866. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-79866, the effect of the effect of the different predetermined display effects is insufficient, so that the player cannot pay attention to the predetermined display, and the entertainment is not interesting. There is a problem that it cannot be improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of invention 155SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5) capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SGS005T including a special timer or an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer);
A suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect or a cut-in effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and a predetermined operation using a predetermined display displayed on the display unit in response to the execution of the suggestion effect (e.g., The operation of subtracting the values of the normal timer and the special timer) is performed, and the display mode of the predetermined display is set to a specific mode (for example, the normal timer and the special timer are set to timer out (the values of the normal timer and the special timer are set to 0)). An effect (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-14) that can at least execute an effect (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect);
With
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect (e.g., a normal timer effect) and a second predetermined effect (e.g., a special timer effect) having an effect mode different from the first predetermined effect,
Before executing the predetermined effect, the effect execution means may include a first special effect (for example, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect) and a second special effect (for example, a different effect mode from the first special effect). (For example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect execution suggestive effect execution process shown in FIGS. 10 to 15).
When the second predetermined effect is executed, the advantageous state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first predetermined effect is executed (for example, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, The part where the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed),
When the second special effect is executed, the second predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first special effect is executed (for example, a second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed). In the case, the portion controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed. Can be improved.

Further, as means 2 of invention 155SG,
The special effect is an effect that indicates the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the first timer effect execution suggestion is performed before the normal timer effect or the special timer effect). Part that performs the effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect),
The effect execution means can execute the special effect at different timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 as a modified example 155SG-2, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect and a second timer effect execution suggestion effect. Where the execution timing differs from
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to at what timing the special effect is executed, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

Further, as means 3 of invention 155SG,
A period from the execution of the first special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect is different from a period from the execution of the second special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a modification example). As 155SG-3, the period from the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect, and the normal timer effect or the special timer after the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. The part that varies the period until the performance is performed)
According to this feature, in the period from the execution of the special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect, the gaming becomes monotonous, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 155SG,
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer),
The special effect is an effect indicating the period of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect). Of the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
The effect executing means,
The predetermined effect can be executed for at least one of the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), A part that reports the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
As the special effect, it is possible to suggest a total value of a predetermined effect period for the first predetermined display and a predetermined effect period for the second predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 10-24 (A)). As shown in (1), a portion that reports the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B)
According to this feature, a gaming machine is described, which indicates a total value of a predetermined effect period for the first predetermined display and a predetermined effect period for the second predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

Further, as means 5 of the invention 155SG,
An operation detecting means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation;
The effect performing means may be a common effect based on the detection result of the motion detecting means at a timing before the execution of the first special effect and the second special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B)). In which the image display device 5 can execute an operation prompting image 148SG005P that prompts a player to operate the push button 31B). For example, since the player can be made to pay attention to which of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed after the common effect, the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range that does not depart from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described below.

  In addition, all or some of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiments and the modifications and the configurations shown in the embodiments and the modifications described below may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

Other gaming machines of the present invention include gaming machines capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machines 1 and slot machines),
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or a remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical value display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer, A display unit (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modification 156SG-1;
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). -22 (A), FIG. 10-23 (A), and FIG. 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period. As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. Addition to both of the remaining games)),
further,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
It is characterized by:

  According to this feature, as a special effect, an effect with the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as suggestion targets can be executed, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved. Furthermore, attention can be paid to which of the suggested effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

  Further, the predetermined effect may be associated with the title notification. For example, the title notification may be executed during the execution of the predetermined effect, and the notification mode of the title notification may be changed after the end of the predetermined effect. By doing so, it is possible to estimate whether or not the mode of the title notification changes after the execution of the predetermined effect, and the interest is improved.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can enhance the interest, as the gaming machine of the present invention, other gaming machines that can play games (for example, pachinko gaming machines 1 and slot machines). So,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or a remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical value display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer, A display unit (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modification 156SG-1;
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). -22 (A), FIG. 10-23 (A), and FIG. 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period. As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. A part to be added to both of the number of remaining games). Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has mounted thereon various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 11A. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 11A.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 11-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. Note that a display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 receives various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 11A is sealed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 11A) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio after the installation in the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is checked whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  The power supply board is sealed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later is changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can set a predetermined number of boards such as the main board 11, the production control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation are facilitated.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Thus, only a clerk having a predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a store clerk having a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among game store clerks. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation using a predetermined key. The lock switch 21TM051 is capable of performing the switching operation and performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even when no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in an OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won the respective winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out-opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And an LED control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 11B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 11B, on the payout control board 21TM037, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having the payout control CPU 21TM371, RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered by the camera, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). Note that a detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that a payout control microcomputer is provided. 21TM370 is capable of recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a separately.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates a ball out state or the detection signal from the full switch 21TM048 indicates a full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level with respect to the firing board 21TM090 to stop the ball firing from the hit ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, a connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is established between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the acknowledgment signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with the device. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to a game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. When a predetermined error (error such as lending a ball, filling up the tank, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is performed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Note that the specific signal exchange between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 by serial communication will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11-22 and FIGS.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 11B.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 11-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. To the interface board (relay board) 21TM066, a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected.

  From the interface board 21TM066, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the operation of the player. . Also, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 11-2.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit is changed. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 11A to 11F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 11-4A, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11E, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 11-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F. Separately provided, the jackpot determination is performed using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, a description will be given of the display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment.

  The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning a first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning a second starting winning opening (electric chew), a large winning opening. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the (Attacker) are input, the number of firing balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays the number of prize balls in the total winning port (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. Percentage (%), the percentage of the total prize balls, and the percentage of the total number of prize balls due to the prize in the second starting winning opening (Deng Chu) and the total number of prize balls in the total winning prize ball (Attacker) A base ratio (%), which is a ratio of a certain combination (%) and a ratio of the total number of award balls to the number of game balls launched, is displayed. The repetition ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to winning in the big winning opening (attacker). The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the winning number of balls in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (the following number of acquired balls). Is the percentage that is accounted for. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained below) is calculated based on the number of prize balls by winning in the special winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize port (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the second start prize port (electric chute). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing ratio of the game balls varies, so that the expected winning ratio of the game balls varies. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening and general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chute) are fixed objects, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. As a result, the expected winning percentage of the game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of totaling and calculating information on winnings in the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. The number of balls (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (electric chew prize balls), and the winning in the large winning opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is defined as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chu prize balls), the number of special electric The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the total ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 prize balls is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning a large winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning percentage (%) for 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the repetition ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of award balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of award balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of award balls by winning a large winning opening (attacker), the award ball If the total number is input and tabulated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game is provided for each set value, and includes a general winning prize ball, a first starting winning prize ball, a normal electric winning prize ball, and a special electric winning. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) is described. A method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) when the total number of the bonuses acquired balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous bonus item acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker. The hit total is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). The winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus ball acquisitions / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive acquired ball + number of acquired ball) / total acquired number] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by the 600. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the obtained ball.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform only operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is discarded from the 00A410h of the number of the acquired ball, and the number of the acquired ball is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning ball obtained are 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

The board case 21TM201 is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is discarded from the 00A410h of the number of the acquired ball, and the number of the acquired ball is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the stored value of the checksum is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  The calculation of the winning combination (%) is, for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired bonus balls is 19876, the divisor is divided by 34321 for 19876, and the ratio is calculated. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When an operation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, the calculation at the decimal point must be avoided. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the error in the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, resulting in + 0.3% error. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the possibility that the error may be large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every five seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric chew each detect that a game medium has won, and the respective award balls are individually counted based on the detection result. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and using a sensor provided after a discharge path for discharging a game medium that has won the attacker and a game medium that has won the electric chew, the detection result is used. , The number of the accessory acquired balls and the number of the continuous accessory acquired balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 11C). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In the present embodiment, the form in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is counted by the special winning number counter is exemplified, but other inventions are not limited to this, and these first inventions are not limited thereto. A first grand prize counter that counts the number of prizes to the winning opening and a second grand prize counter that counts the number of prizes to the second winning prize are separately provided to win the first grand prize. The number and the number of winnings in the second big winning opening may be individually tabulated, and the respective winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings in the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 11-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the rear side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch which is operated when a situation arises in which the calculation of the ratio or the combination of the ratios has to be performed again, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio of the ratio or the combination of the ratios. For this reason, this switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or a winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings. In the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. The caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. With the provision of the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 21TM201, and illegal acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The board case 21TM201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a "swaging board case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 21TM011S for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 21TM201. The seal 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. Thus, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In the first display unit 21TM029A of the first digit, the totaled set values (1 to 6) and the RAM clear notification (“C”) that notifies that the RAM clear executed after the processing of the setting change mode by the CPU 103 has been completed are completed. ) Is displayed, the totaling period is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C of the third digit, the fourth display unit 21TM029D of the fourth digit, and the fifth display unit of the fifth digit 21TM029E displays a numerical value as a percentage. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Also, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on 60000 prize balls immediately before is displayed. Is done.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the connection ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening in the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  The main board 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio and the base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general winning port switches to the fourth general winning port switch and the discharge port switch 21TM070. A switch process for checking the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The value of the first start winning number counter and the value of the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number are output. The values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the number of hits counter is added, so that each entry area is added. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). (Included in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning opening based on the totaled number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of prizes to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 11-6, the number of prize balls for each prize port divided here is a prize ball for a prize ball for a general prize port prize ball (first general prize port to fourth general prize port (sode)). ), First starting winning opening prize ball (winning prize ball at the first starting winning opening (navel)), ordinary electric prize winning ball (winning prize ball in electric chew), special electric winning prize ball (attacker Prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting are calculated. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. The number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of award balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of award balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer also has a 0-th storage area consisting of a 2-byte maximum counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning openings, for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and for the total sum. I have. The storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets is constituted by a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 has an association ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of 10 sets and the total total, a base of 10 sets (base 2), and a base of the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the number of prize balls based on the winning number of the game balls to each of the winning ports of the 10 sets and the total total. And the sum total combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio. The connection ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios for the 10 sets and the total total is configured by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the ten sets and the total total are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum of 1 byte counter.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls into the respective winning openings of 10 sets, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes for each of the ten sets for each winning port is stored in the base storage area. For example, when storing the bases 1 and 2 as integers, the bases 1 and 2 can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 on the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. More specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 11-7, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 reads data from the ROM 101 by designating the ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas, a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via this register area. Is written.

  The address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to RWM areas (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies the RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to read data from the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of the RAM 102 (a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area stores instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions to be executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area has the reference data referred to by the control program. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total winning combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a zero storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, etc.) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 11-9 (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No1, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term role ratio. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-3), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E include
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1). The short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is indicated by a display changeover switch 21TM030 as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) and 18 (B). Based on the operation, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, and the display when the set value is “2” Short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1, base 2, short-term ratio when the set value is "3", short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning combination, the base 1, and the base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “2”, and the short term ratio, the short term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “4”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is "5", The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “6”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  Although the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, other inventions are not limited to this. 21TM029 may be able to display only one numerical value or any two numerical values among these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the history of the awarded number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

  In the present embodiment, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the short-term ratio and short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term ratio, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  Further, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage unit stores the sum and total accumulated storage areas of the 10 sets and the duty ratio storage area for storing the winning combination and the duty ratio of the 10 sets and the total sum, respectively.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 10, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively set to “27” “81” “ 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be deleted once, and then the new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 11-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then executes the game control main process from step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, a wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 performs initialization of the built-in device (eg, initialization of a CTC (counter / timer) and a PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050). The access state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  If the ON state is detected in checking the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status.

  Upon transition to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating the control to the setting change mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and the operation for turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as described below, each time a setting change operation is received, a display control is performed in which the displayed set value is increased by one and returned to one after reaching six.

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 deletes the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The set value is changed to the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, thereby fixing the set value. Then, the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and as a result, the set value stored in the RAM 102 The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in the above-described step S21TM1120, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 performs the setting for confirming the set value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal with the transition to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits, as an effect control command for the effect control board 12, a setting confirmation mode command designating that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 executes the processing shown in FIG. The process proceeds to a determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process has been performed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S21TM1110 that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 executes the clear switch input through the input port as shown in FIG. (Setting switch mounted on the power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes a power-off detection process (see FIG. 11-14). It is determined whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the setting change is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the mode and the setting confirmation mode, and (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case in which the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the processing has been executed, and the processing in step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power-off detection process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power supply interruption, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on and not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), CPU 103 performs a game state restoring process (processes in step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning game control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping power supply. More specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output This is an area where the output state of the port is stored (output port buffer), a part where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area in which the determined set value is stored) is also included in the part that must not be initialized. Further, for each set value, an area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored is also included in the part that must not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1360). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply, based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like, the power supply is restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES) or if no backup data is stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), an initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In the present example, the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is executed as follows: (1) The setting is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Is also OFF, based on the determination of NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the process immediately proceeds to step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and the case where (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. , The setting check mode is entered, and the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined as NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the end of the setting check mode. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time saving flag, and the like) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped is cleared and the initial value is cleared. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared, and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  Also, by performing the processes of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a process for selectively performing a process according to a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In the present embodiment, the mode in which the mode is shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is exemplified on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, but other inventions are not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode is conditioned on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300). It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the effect such as the game state has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits the setting command specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 11-19 and 11-21). The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a large hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is used to determine an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable prize ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140), and then transmits a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (Step S21TM1470). When the CPU 103 is set to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on receiving the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect, and the like. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as the lamp 9. The effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and can specify the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 11 to 14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that a game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to execute a switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch processing in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). That the level of magnetism determined is detected, that the vibration of the level determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and that the level and frequency band of the level determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown) Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins one of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signals are input from the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for performing settings and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays winning information such as a winning ratio such as a winning ratio, a connecting ratio, and a base (step S21TM1640), and displays winning information such as a winning ratio, a connecting ratio, and a base calculated by the winning information. The winning information display control process to be displayed on the 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM1650). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined main-side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set, and a step in the next timer interrupt is set. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information, and payout information which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of one-sided tilting operation.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control processing, in the output port included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced in accordance with the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting control data in an output port for transmitting an effect control command to the control board 12, predetermined control data is set in an output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning off after that, the effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the variation pattern or the variation display has been completed is transmitted. By transmitting the existing command such as the information of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the effect control board 12, the setting value may be periodically notified. Further, by receiving these commands from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) executes an effect indicating the set value at various timings, such as during a variable display or a big hit game. You may.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode. This is because, as shown in FIG. 11-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs according to the set value. For example, the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning prize before the setting change is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value before the change, but is determined to be out of relation with the set value after the change. Conversely, an event may be determined to be a loss in relation to the set value before the change, but determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of the winning start before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt process including the special symbol process process is executed). Since it is inappropriate, the game state is initialized to clear the hold memory (special symbol hold memory, ordinary symbol hold memory), and the number of hold memories is set to the initial value (0). I have.

  Also, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, as a result of the interrupt permission of step S21TM1540 not being performed, the switch processing (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed, and the start prize and the winning are not performed. Passing through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not been executed yet and the random number has not been updated during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the random number will be the same regardless of the timing of the start winning, and the game is played based on such a random number. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, starting winning a prize and passing through the gate are invalidated.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk or the like at a game arcade, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), a store clerk or the like of the game arcade switches the clear switch (setting changeover switch). When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value "1") is displayed. (Step S21TM1150).

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A in this way, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a store clerk of the game arcade or the like. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display is performed in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the lock switch 21TM051 described later is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the set value “1” in this example) is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. Is changed (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the game arcade or the like (YES in step S21TM1180) and stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed to the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ) (Overwritten), and the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 causes the first display unit 21TM029A to blink, thereby notifying the clerk of the game arcade that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102, and that the control of the setting change mode has been completed. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

  Note that once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area Neither the stored set value “2”) nor the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changeable even after the set value is determined, there is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) ends, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state at the time of power failure is cleared, and the initial value is cleared. Is set, the gaming state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying a clerk or the like of the game hall that the RAM clearing process has been performed (RAM clearing notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the clerk at the game hall or the like grasps that the setting change mode ends (the set value is determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a fluctuation display result, a jackpot type, a fluctuation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  Note that, in the setting change mode of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is exemplified. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is, for example, the most advantageous setting value for the player ("6" in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous setting for the player. It is also possible to display an appropriate setting value (“1” in this embodiment).

  Further, with the end of the setting change mode, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 of the change of the connection ratio and the combination corresponding to the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) after the notification of the RAM clear. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. In addition, for each set value, each total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the order (in ascending or descending order of the set values).

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the lock value of the RAM 102 is The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. (In the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set values "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the set value (in this example, stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A)). Set value "1") is displayed (step 21TM1230).

  Note that, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, the first display unit is operated even when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game room clerk or the like when the setting check mode is controlled. The numerical value (setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area in this example) displayed on 21TM029A is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example) In this case, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting check mode is being controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by the store clerk at the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing after step S21TM1320, a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a fluctuation display result, a jackpot type, a fluctuation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed. That is, when the processing in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the processing related to the RAM clear, except when the result of the determination in step S21TM1320 or S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the set value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the set value (the set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch) If the condition for controlling to the setting confirmation mode that 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk of the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 at the time of turning on the power. In order to shift to, the operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. Do not perform the operation. In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control any of them) when the power is turned on, and to perform the initialization processing. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to perform an initialization process in order to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (the RAM clear is not executed except when it is determined NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if a clerk at the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, the power is temporarily turned off, and the game state is changed to the setting check mode when the power is turned on thereafter. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement arcade side, the setting value can be checked without any trouble by the setting checking mode.

  In addition, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 displays the setting values (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029, such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. May be displayed. In addition, for each set value, each total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the order (in ascending or descending order of the set values).

  FIG. 11-17 shows a setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The example which notifies that it shifted to the setting check mode is performed. FIG. 11-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 11-17 (2) is an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. An example of an image displayed on the device 5 is shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 11-17 (1), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1140 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the character “Setting is being changed”, and outputs sounds (for example, “Setting is being changed”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has changed to the setting change mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting change mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (1), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being changed”) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the text “setting is being changed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 at step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or at step S21TM1460, CPU 103). The control CPU for effect control 120 specifies that the microcomputer 100 for game control has finished the setting change mode, based on the reception of the initialization command at the time of power-on transmitted to the effect control board 12 from That fact can be reported. For example, on the image display device 5, a character “Setting change completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting is being changed”) for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change mode is not set. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). With the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 11-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1220 in the main process, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters “Setting is being confirmed”, and outputs a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being checked”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode, so that the setting confirmation is performed. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state where a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by a VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being changed”) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, a white blinking manner). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters “Setting is being confirmed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or alternatively, in step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, the CPU 120 for effect control is set by the microcomputer 100 for game control based on the reception of the backup command for power-off recovery or the initialization command for power-on transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460). It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended, and to notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, a character “Setting confirmation completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting confirmation is being performed”) indicating that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting check mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). With the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. 11-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-18 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 11-18 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 11-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 11-18 (4) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 11-18 (4) indicates that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. 11-18 (1), the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (2), and the setting suggestive mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (2). In the case of deciding on the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3), the judgment value of is assigned.

  When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is executed at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high ratio (for example, 50%), and It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) is executed at the ratio (for example, 30%) of (3). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low rate (for example, 20%), It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) is executed at the ratio (for example, 30%) of (3).

  In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is performed, and The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the “sunny” mode. You expect to be done.

  Next, the award ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 11-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. The connection confirmation signal indicates that a prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the output circuit 21TM067, and is controlled through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each of the connection confirmation signals is 1-bit data, and is transmitted by one signal line. It should be noted that the connection confirmation signal is set to an output enabled state by setting an initial value to a bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440.)

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 as in the game control microcomputer 100. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and functions of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as those of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 included in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set contents of the 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to check whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command. Is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the command. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error (abnormal state in which the award ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit “x” is set. Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. . The content of the data of the winning ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is released by the prize port switch corresponding to the general prize port 10. When detected, ten prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the prize ball number command “01010111” for notifying three prize balls is transmitted, and the general winning port 10 is transmitted. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the prize ball number is determined. A prize ball number command “0101110” for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. It should be noted that any one of the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command is transmitted as a winning ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the condition for paying out the prize balls (the occurrence of a prize or the like). In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits while sharing the upper 4 bits. You may do so.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the award ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, it is not configured to set data indicating error information in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation ends, so that the data indicating the error information is set and transmitted in the next connection OK command without transmitting the error information at that timing. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the award ball end command.

  The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not been completed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 generates a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. In addition, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. As with the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits according to the error state (by changing the predetermined bit). Further, any of the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a received ACK signal. The award ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state where an error has occurred but the award ball operation cannot be performed, but also in a state where the award ball operation is being performed.

  The prize ball preparation command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted, based on the state where an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 11-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 11-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 11-20. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. The connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit built in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505. In FIG. 11-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, actually, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The winning ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a winning ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a winning ball end command, and a winning ball preparation command.

  FIG. 11-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 11-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the connection OK command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the point of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). In addition, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the winning ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the setting processing of the internal device register of step S21TM1840 and the processing of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used to the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Is set. Then, the interruption by the channel is used as a timer interruption. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process for driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal relating to the payout of a prize ball from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request) May be included.) Is performed.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector transmitted by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of the channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt that is generated when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, an initial value is set to a flag, a counter, and the like in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the prize ball unpaid number counter initial value in the prize ball unpaid number counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing according to the same processing as the processing of initializing the priority performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, the process enters a loop process for monitoring occurrence of a timer interrupt.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 11-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following processing as payout control processing. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result to a predetermined byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked but the input state is checked. Check the state of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control processing, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, processing for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). The payout control CPU 21TM 371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Furthermore, a prize ball lending control process for controlling to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050 and for controlling to pay out a number of prize balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes an error process for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information or ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 in accordance with the result of the error processing, and a display control process for turning on the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball out LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full error, an out-of-ball error, or a prepaid card unit unconnection error) are detected in an error process described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED21TM374 based on the error bit being set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the award ball LED 21TM053 when the award ball is being paid out. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication processing of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the award ball number command shown in FIGS. 11-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When receiving the award ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, when there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 performs an interrupt request issued by the serial communication circuit 21TM 380. Execute the interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interruption process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether the read reception data is a winning ball number command in the reception interruption process. When the received data is the winning ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the winning ball number indicated by the winning ball number command to the winning ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 11-25 is a diagram illustrating a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), a payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), a payout motor 21TM289, and a ball rental executed between the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for explaining communication processing of. Here, as described later, there are a first ball lending restriction method to a fourth ball lending restriction method described below as methods for restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcontroller) is used from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) In the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is used. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. (4) In the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is controlled during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent a disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, ball lending in a gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, the first to fourth ball lending restriction methods are specifically described.

  FIG. 11-26 is a timing chart for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. The power supply to the gaming machine is started, and based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 11-13 (see FIG. 11-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lending balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 falls the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not set the connection confirmation signal to the ON state, thereby controlling the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Can be prevented from running. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 11-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming a communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that no connection confirmation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the PRDY signal is turned on even when the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected to the connection confirmation command. It is not in the state, but in the OFF state.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, if the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the microcomputer is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal in the ON state based on not receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is switched to the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. In order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 11-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIGS. 11-29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) is open. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but is turned off.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Since both the payout signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball is not operated even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is operated by the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  Then, the clerk of the game hall or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, whereby the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a clerk of the game arcade closes the game machine frame 3 so as to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. That is, during the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled by the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal of an open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 11 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming a communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON based on the connection confirmation signal being ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection control command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 sets even if the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, a state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While executing the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out) after the BRQ signal is turned on, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal. I do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state, The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the EXS signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, in FIG. 11-30, if a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the EXS signal remains OFF after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even when a predetermined time has elapsed, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. May be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process corresponding to the ball lending operation received during the setting change mode or the period of the setting confirmation mode may be performed.) (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute ball lending restriction during setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues transmitting the connection confirmation command even during the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming a communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the fact that the connection confirmation command has been received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100). When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is output. Is turned on.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 outputs an EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. Is turned on, and when the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  Thus, even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked at the same time, and workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after ending the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. When the payout of a predetermined number of game media ends and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. As described above, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending being executed and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is subsequently turned on, FIG. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on, and the setting is performed. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 11-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), from the number-of-payouts count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  After that, in the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, the power supply is resumed, and the payout control is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is completed (the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Perform a payout operation. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power interruption and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to a power outage during the execution of the ball lending, even if the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, the setting is not performed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the interrupted payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-32, the payout processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption during the payout processing, and the power supply is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. After the end of the above, the example in which the interrupted payout process is restarted is shown. However, this power-off is caused by the clerk of the game hall turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. The power may be cut off, or the power may be cut off by turning off the power switch 21TM055 with the closing of the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, but also during the payout processing, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or the opening of the glass door frame 3a. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and thereafter, the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting check mode ends, the interrupted payout process is performed. You may make it restart.

(Forcible termination of ball rental due to power outage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball rental is being performed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored will be specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 11-33, when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted and the payout is not restarted even after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 11-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  After that, in the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, a predetermined number to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power failure occurs (before the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is not made for the unpaid number that has not been paid out due to the stoppage of the payout (forced termination). Not done. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change mode or the setting. By not executing the payout for the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is completed, the control of backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-33, when the power is cut off during the payout, the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, so that the payout being executed is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle. Not limited to such a mode, as in the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 32, when the power is cut off, the data of the unpaid number is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. Under the condition that neither is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed based on the data of the unpaid number that has been backed up (payout is restarted based on the backup data). When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting is not performed. Do not run the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium even after the change mode or setting confirmation mode end may be so.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 11-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 11-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This makes it possible to prevent payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Award ball payout control)
FIG. 11-34 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 11-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception.

  Although not shown, a prize is awarded during the execution of the communication processing of the connection confirmation (between transmitting the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal). In such a case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and sends the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, the command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Winning is invalid during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 11-35 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interruption permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 11-13, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth winning port switch. A special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like, in which a switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIGS. 11 to 14) for confirming a state of each of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is not executed. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIGS. 11 to 14) and the like are not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 does not detect the detection signal output from each switch, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. That is, during the period in which the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the totaling of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, the tabulation of each item such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is not required. , The processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  In the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening. And That is, it does not transmit the winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on not receiving the winning ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize ball is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23 A switch process for confirming the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed each winning opening, and a prize ball number command (and a connection confirmation command) can be transmitted. Become. In addition, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process including a big hit determination process.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has received the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal receives the ACK signal. A connection OK command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 as a signal. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning holes (when a winning is generated), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the gaming control microcomputer 100 as a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and has received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  If the switch processing is executed during the setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, the jackpot determination random number is extracted, and the jackpot determination is performed based on the jackpot determination random number. In the case where the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number which is a big hit with the set value before the change but is not a big hit with the set value after the change (the set value after the determination), Although the set value does not result in a big hit, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number which becomes the big hit with the changed set value (set value after determination). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value is complicated, and the player or the game arcade may be disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the payout of the prize ball based on the passing of the game ball through each winning port is not performed, and the big hit determination process is not performed. Is prevented from complicating the relationship between the execution timing and the set value, and disadvantages of the player or the playground are prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, but also in the setting check mode in which the set value is displayed but cannot be changed, similarly, the winning is invalidated, and the big hit determination process is not executed. I have to. For example, unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is executed instead of when the power is turned on, and the switch period is controlled during the setting check mode. If the special symbol process process can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control can be performed only at the time of turning on the power, similarly to the setting change mode. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (step S21TM1500). . Accordingly, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in has been invalidated. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, or the like, whether a game stop error has occurred during the period in which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game. If it is determined (step S21TM1615) that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol processing (step S21TM16) in the same interrupt processing S21TM1690) is not executed, so that the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  Note that by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Accordingly, the microcomputer 100 for game control sends the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout as a prize ball request signal to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout based on the fact that the connection OK command has not been received during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the prize ball number command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, Winning can be invalidated.

  During the game (in a state where the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. . Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 11-35 can be applied, and based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 , Switch processing and special symbol processing are preferably not executed.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening). It is good. When such a configuration is employed, as described above, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, thereby controlling the payout control. The payout is invalidated without executing the payout control by the microcomputer 21TM370, and the special symbol process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during detection of gaming machine frame / door frame opening)
FIG. 11-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the normal operation. A connection OK command is received as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path on which the flowing prize balls are stored, so if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning ports, the microcomputer 100 for game control transmits a command for the number of prize balls as a prize ball request signal to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Is not executed without driving the prize ball. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 switches the payout motor 21TM289. The game machine is driven to execute payout control of a predetermined number (a number specified by a prize ball number command) of prize balls according to a prize during a period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  When detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the payout of the prize ball, and The data of the unpaid number out of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 switches the payout motor 21TM289. The game machine is driven to execute payout control of game media corresponding to the unpaid number. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 11-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operate as long as the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is not opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the game is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the game. It is normal that the machine frame 3 is open. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of the prize ball is not executed. As a result, the payout of the prize balls during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode is limited.

  Next, the control when the power is cut off during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power-down in different charts based on the difference in the situation when the power-down occurs. The power-off pattern shown in FIG. 11-37 (1) indicates control when power-off occurs in a state where “set value confirmation” is not performed during “setting value change”, and power-off recovery is performed. The setting value at the time becomes the setting value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the power-off pattern shown in FIG. 11-37 (2) indicates the control when the power-off occurs in the situation where the “set value decision” is performed during “the setting value is being changed”. The set value at power recovery is the set value at the time of power failure.

  That is, FIG. 11-37 (1) shows a setting in the case where the power is cut off without the “set value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 11-37 (2) shows the control related to the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of “set value determination” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Is shown.

  FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from the top to the bottom in the order of occurrence (see the “Order” and “Status” columns). ). In addition, in FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (order 1 to 8) is shown in the column of “lock switch”. In the column of “set value”, set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the column of "set value display" in the figure, the display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. I have.

  When a setting change operation is performed, as shown at the top of the “Status” column in FIG. 11-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (order 1), and As shown in the “Lock Switch” column, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. In FIG. 11-37 (1), the “set value” at the time of “power-on” in order 1 is “1” because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , "1".

  Also, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the column of "set value display" is blank (blank) just at this stage because the power has just been turned on. This is before the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is performed, indicating that the display of the set value has not been started.

  After the “power-on” status, the “setting change mode starts” status (order 2). Then, in this “setting change mode start”, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the “lock switch” column is “ON”, and the “setting value” column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that it has not been changed from the set value stored in the set value storage area of the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the setting information and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 3) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the "setting value" column remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the set value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to "2".

  Further, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 4) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), since the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “set value” column remains “1”. Is changed from “2” to “3”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. To the new value "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the power is cut off during “setting value change” (order 5), no operation for finalizing the setting value is performed, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not set. Has not been executed (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value), the column of "set value" remains "1". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON and power is turned on (order 6), then In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". Note that, in the order 7, the same applies to a case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the restoration of the power is: The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on (before the power-off occurs) are used. As described above, it is possible to appropriately set the set value in the case where the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power is cut off after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 11-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power supply shuts down before the set value is determined is omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, the “set value determination” shown in order 5 is performed after the “setting value is being changed” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, during the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored set value (the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", and the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, when the power is cut off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the set value) is executed. The column of “setting value” is “3”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3” which is different from the value when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the status of the “start of the setting change mode” (the order 7) In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “set value” column is “3”, and the “set value display” column is also “3”. Note that, in the order 8, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, if the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 during the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement arcade may erroneously shift the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further perform the setting change operation (the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, the change of the set value can be stopped to return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. The handling of the set value in such an unstable state poses a problem. However, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is turned off. If a power failure occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time of power-on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined, and the control of the set value becomes unstable. Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate control relating to the set value.

  FIG. 11-38 is an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) notifies that an operation for changing a set value has been performed.

  FIG. 11-38 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. The main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of a special symbol) (game control). (Step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game), transmits a lock switch operation command indicating that lock switch 21TM051 is operated to effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of timer interrupt processing for game control). When detecting that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated. Command to the production control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command are transmitted to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and performs the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify the user of the fact that control is not performed in any of the setting check modes. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed.

  In this example, based on the fact that both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command have been received, the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch as an abnormal operation warning notification. Are displayed on the image display device 5. In the abnormal operation warning notification, since the display priority is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. Even during the variable display of the symbol, the store clerk at the game arcade confirms that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. By grasping clearly, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been performed. Note that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound (for example, a sound indicating that the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected) to notify that the operation for changing the setting value has been detected, and outputs the game effect lamp 9. May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red flashing mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In this embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the configuration can be set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. (Operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Accordingly, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are performed during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is being performed or the period in which the variable display of the ordinary symbol is being performed. In such a case, there is a possibility that the setting value is being illegally changed.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during a period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, to detect the fraud. I try to deter them.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally in an open state, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, ball lending is suspended or stopped, and award ball payout is also suspended or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is opened. Thus, the back side of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position can be seen from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are set regardless of whether or not the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When the operation is performed, the fact that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value are performed is notified to enhance the deterrence of fraud.

(Setting change corresponding signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 11-39, the information output circuit 112 in the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from a first terminal to a tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A game machine frame / door frame open signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned ON when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when it is on.

  From the third terminal, a signal for the total number of symbols determined is output. The all symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when it is determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed to derive the display result. This is a pulse-like signal output when displayed (when it is determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. From the fourth terminal, an all starting port signal is output. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball is won to the first starting winning port and is also output when a game ball is received to the second starting winning port. The pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  The jackpot 1 signal is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. The jackpot outputs two jackpot signals. The big hit 2 signal is turned on when being controlled to the big hit game state, and is turned on also when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which one big hit signal is in the OFF state and two big hit signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as will be described later. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls fired in the game area and guided to the outlet) are detected by the outlet switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. .1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. A winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins a winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). This is a pulse-like signal that is output each time a winning is detected by the switch) and is output each time 10 winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where the misconduct is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each of the winning ports (for example, a game ball is frequently transmitted to the first starting prize port at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, the case where the switch abnormality detection occurs is included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed ten times or more in succession). (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal, and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the seventh terminal. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode at power-on, a setting corresponding change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-40 (2), when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM is cleared after the power is turned on and the control mode is set to the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. Similarly to the case described above, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  If the RAM is cleared without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is not changed in the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even if the result of the check is not normal), the state is ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the input period of the security signal reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is determined that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the security signal can be recognized by the device and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting control mode may have been temporarily controlled. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility of executing the RAM clear and the possibility of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (3), a configuration in which the security signal is not output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled may be adopted. This configuration includes a configuration in which the security signal is output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Does not output the security signal and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but no security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting check mode, the OFF state of the security signal is maintained based on the fact that the RAM is not cleared. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting control mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (4), a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled may be adopted. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM has been cleared with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the control mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, if the RAM is cleared without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state, while the security signal is set to the OFF state. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting check mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. , And clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (6), when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame / door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is kept on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There is a case where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal due to restrictions on the assignment of the setting change correspondence signal. The example of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal assignment in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where the misconduct is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each of the winning ports (for example, a game ball is frequently transmitted to the first starting prize port at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, the case where the switch abnormality detection occurs is included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed ten times or more in succession). (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 11-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as will be described later. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that an illegal act has been performed to the outside, and to provide an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal. Without this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that there is a possibility that a process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is disabled). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off), and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (vehicle number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the management device sets the set value based on the machine number and the setting change corresponding signal. By displaying the set value and the predetermined set value in association with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying the set value in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the manager of the game arcade via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the manager and the setting values changed in the setting change work. The administrator can grasp the inconsistency with the value. Then, when such inconsistency has occurred, by performing setting confirmation or re-setting change work for the gaming machine, it is possible to achieve appropriate management of settings for a plurality of gaming machines in the amusement store. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting check mode. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-41, a pulse corresponding to the set value is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. In this example, the same pulses as the number of set values are output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode ends without the setting value being changed. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Is output as one pulse.

  As described above, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set the value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (A set value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and a signal for notifying the set value are output from a common information output terminal. Becomes possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, but also at predetermined predetermined timings, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. You. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid prize balls by 1000. In addition, when an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3 a, detection of a magnetic abnormality, etc. (When it occurs), and outputs a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), one pulse is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal in response to the occurrence of a big hit.

  Thereby, in the external device, it is possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. For example, when the setting change corresponding signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined subsequent timing, and the prevention of improper change of the set value by an inappropriate method can be enhanced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 has been changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the change of the set value in the setting change mode. In this case, when the setting change mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Three pulses are output as a signal. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), a pulse of 3 is output as a setting change correspondence signal in a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 11-41 (2), an operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value is changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a pulse-like setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. I have. As described above, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the common signal output processing is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. Thus, the signal output processing can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Is output as one pulse. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change correspondence signal in a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control mode is set to the setting check mode by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set values notified in the setting check mode (setting values stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on). A setting value stored in the area, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the control is in the setting confirmation mode, and a setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal assignment pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed following the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. After the elapse of 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state is turned off, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, a pulse number (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Is output.

(Modification of the game control main process)
Next, another embodiment related to the game control main process of FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44. FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 11-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM2110 in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processes involved in the initialization process (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. I do. The processing shown in steps S21TM2120 to S2170 is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1230 to S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off restoration in step S21TM2170 or transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 11-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated at power-on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  If the RAM clear flag is set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status. The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. After executing the processing of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is deleted (step S21TM2410), and the flow advances to step S21TM2550.

  When the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated at the time of turning on the power (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 checks the setting to confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the flow proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined to be NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Is not controlled in the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state at the time of turning on the power, a series of processes relating to Steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in Steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270), and then transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When the CPU 103 is controlled to be in the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270), and then transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting change mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting check mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting check mode has ended, the setting command can be received. Since it is possible for the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended, the number of commands can be reduced. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other Modifications of Feature 21TM)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is not limited to such a form. Is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clearing). It may be. With this configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) are different from the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. Is closer, when changing the set value, it is easy to check the set value and to perform a switching operation in accordance with the check of the set value, thereby improving workability.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the game information such as the totaled base is displayed is described. The present invention is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game state is displayed, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly grasped, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be employed in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) in sequence while being controlled to the setting change mode (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds) and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (the set value stored in the set information temporary storage area) is stored in the set value storage area (the set value stored in the set value storage area is stored in the set information temporary storage area). The set value may be determined by overwriting the set value. The store clerk at the game hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the time when the set value to be determined is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and the value is displayed at that time. The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, the example has been described in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of game media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. An enclosed gaming machine may be one in which a gaming medium is sealed in a gaming machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. In the enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, For example, being controlled by the setting change mode, being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, being within the period controlled by the setting change mode, being within the period being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, May be included, indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information may be transmitted from the information output circuit 112 to a management device such as a hall computer or the like, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is within the period controlled in the setting change mode, the period is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the like. Is shown, but the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4A, The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the like may be used to notify that the setting change mode is being controlled (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, etc. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Furthermore, a display (number-of-rounds display) for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an instruction for the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The light may be emitted in the embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is changed. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned OFF. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is turned off. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. With such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period during which the apparatus is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and to clearly indicate that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  With respect to the effect indicating the degree of expectation shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expectation. May be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation degree is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (In the case of 1 or 2), an expectation degree suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the expected value indicating that the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed, and the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high. Can be expected from the player, and the player can pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation effect suggestion effect is executed. In addition, even when the reach of the jackpot is low, the expectation effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is executed, so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation degree is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, Other inventions can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted. In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs according to the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and Other Modes of Feature 21TM]
Next, details and other aspects of the above-described feature portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). The gaming machine frame has a hinge mechanism (not shown) at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player). The other end in the left-right direction (for example, the right side as viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner part of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, on the right side when viewed from a player).

  The outer frame is made of metal and is an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame made of a synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape whose center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the game machine frame 3 is locked by the fixing device so as not to come off the game machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are provided. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window that protects a game board surface and allows a game area on the front of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a store clerk at a game arcade performs maintenance on a game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate clogged balls), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism section (one end side) to the near side like a door with the fulcrum as a fulcrum. In order for the store clerk at the game hall to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, and the like, which are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) is pivoted toward the front side like a door by using the hinge mechanism (one end side) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to make the other end open from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can specify a detection signal capable of specifying that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can specify that the glass door frame 3a is open is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
12-1 and FIG. 12-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. 11-11 to FIG. This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-43 to 11-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is similar to the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 11-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 11-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), CPU 103 checks whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process proceeds to a setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a regular value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), a value (for example, 0) different from the above-mentioned regular value is stored in the set value storage area. May be. When the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the data may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is checked whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, and the like) indicating the game state before power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. , The initial value is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized. The notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the effect such as the game state has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoring power supply (step S21TM3045). The process moves to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply, based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like, the power supply is restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. If the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control has been output (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the flow shifts to the processing in step S21TM3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a regular value (step S21TM3020). The setting value is changed and / or changed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070). Confirmation becomes possible, and the process proceeds to the normal game process on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070). .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to set the state in which the set value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). Mode). Further, in addition to the conditions of (1) and (2), further (3) on condition that it is determined in step S21TM3040 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). As described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or there is some irregularity. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

  In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although the control is possible, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is open, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to the normal game process. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the flow shifts to a normal game process. With the transition to the normal game processing, processing corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 11-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 11-44 can be executed. The indicated game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process and the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if regular values (1 to 6) are stored in the set value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, and The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Also, in step S21TM3030, if the normal values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), And transmits a set value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal values (1 to 6), , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value error command is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the setting value error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message “Setting value is abnormal” is displayed. Do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value should be changed (for example, a message “Change the setting value” is displayed). The speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R may notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, output a sound saying “the set value is abnormal.”), And change the set value. It may be informed that the state is to be changed (for example, a sound such as “Please change the set value” is output).

  Upon transmitting the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM3140).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3140), CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3150, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time saving flag, the hold storage, and the like) indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. , The initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, for each set value, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored is not cleared. The tally value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and processes from step S21TM3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Move to The backup command (step S21TM3045) at the time of power-off recovery and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) at the time of power-on are commands transmitted only once at the time of power-on. Therefore, when transmitting these power-on commands, the CPU 103 can specify that the power-on command has been transmitted and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the command transmission flag may be cleared when the process shifts to the normal game process (from step S21TM1470). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, a backup command at the time of power-off restoration (step S21TM3045) and an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, If the answer is YES in step S21TM3020) or if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before shifting to the normal game process, the set value in the set value storage area needs to be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by RAM clear (step S21TM3150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the CPU 103 can change the set value ( (Setting change mode).

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if the determination in step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, or step S21TM3140 results in "NO" in any of the determination processes, the power is turned off once and (1) to (3) when the next power is turned on. Are satisfied, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to the normal value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You may do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the character “Please turn off the power.”) Prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. . If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to urge the user to turn off the power.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of FIG. 12B, the CPU 103 sets a setting change in-progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area storing the value of the setting change flag is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 outputs a setting change correspondence signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode to specify that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the flow shifts to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 performs the setting for designating the control to the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And the state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM3600) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag is determined). Is kept 0).

  In addition, it is possible to output a security signal (step S21TM3540) and display the current setting value (step S3550), and transmit a setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) and update the setting value (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). (The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM3530, if lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, when the setting change in progress flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating the set value stored in the set value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740) indicates that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and that power is cut off during the setting change. Is not present (NO in step S21TM3020) and the setting value is determined to be a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and furthermore, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). NO), that means that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) has not been executed, so that it is sufficient to execute the normal processing at the time of power restoration, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740) means that the RAM has been cleared in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (before YES is determined in step S21TM3530), if the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode, the set value remains 0). When the operation of changing the set value is not performed (for example, when the operation of changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on processing again and executes the processing after step S21TM3010.

  As described above, the clerk at the game hall or the like sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (to execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Can be initialized (that is, the determination in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 is NO and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

  In the control shown in FIG. 12-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all of the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting for being opened. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 instructs to notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting mode or confirm the setting. A command instructing that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 receiving these commands notifies the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and sets the lock switch 21TM051. The user is informed that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended by operating. For example, a message such as “Please open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode” may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 Is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch ( When the (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) performs the setting based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and It can be checked whether or not the operation is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game process, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated, The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 12C is an explanatory diagram of changes in set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. Indicates the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the game hall operates at least the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

  Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the setting value storage area is not a regular value, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding to the value. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize that a value different from the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, and to prompt a setting change operation. If a value (0 in this example) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, if the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the administrator of the game arcade May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to one of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In order to prevent such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (1), if a value different from a regular value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the set value storage area when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, if a setting change operation is performed even once and a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, Regardless of how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value. This is performed, and a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is not stored in the set value storage area, and information (a character E in this example) different from the normal value is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. ) Is not displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (2), when the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, the process proceeds to step S21TM3550. Thus, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the purpose of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed thereafter, During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value, and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (a character of E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), a value (0 in this example) different from a regular value is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on thereafter, if the set value is not changed to a regular value via the setting change mode when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed. become unable. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  Also, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and thereafter, the gaming machine side goes through the setting changing mode. Unless the setting value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to allow the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Restriction of ball lending based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-4. FIG. 12-4 shows the main board 11 when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram for explaining the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 12-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn the PRDY signal ON. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal on, but turns it off.

  As a result, while the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, And the EXS signal are both OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state. Not to be. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 then closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a so that the clerk or the like at the game hall can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The provided game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated unless it is in the open state, the gaming machine frame 3 must be in the open state in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to grasp the control state to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and determination processing for the control state are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode are restricted. You. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control for the ball lending process and the prize ball process is realized.

  In this manner, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected. By restricting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid occurrence of troubles associated with the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and to provide the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Maintenance work and the like when the game machine is opened can smoothly proceed.

(Restart of ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball rental is being performed, and thereafter, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Is specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-5. In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been opened during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a not being in the open state (becoming closed).

  FIG. 12-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Switches the PRDY signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), from the number-of-payouts count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  While the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 operates based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has been completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 changes the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (PRDY signal is turned on). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the above, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

  Therefore, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power failure occurred (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), The payout is executed for the number of unpaid items that have not been paid, so that the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball lending process at power failure occurrence (do not shift to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-6, a process in a case where the payout is interrupted due to a power cutoff during the ball lending and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Will be explained. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is executed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 12-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the period when the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (Step S21TM3050 or Step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM has been cleared, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. .

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300. Then, based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is calculated. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted by the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game media and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending processing at power failure occurrence (transition to setting change mode))
FIG. 12-7 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is changed to the game control microcontroller. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, when the store clerk operates the one clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the RAM clearing which initializes the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are initialized. And clearing the RAM are executed.

  Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 12-7 (2) This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (2), when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been subjected to the RAM clear. do not do.

  FIG. 12-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Has been completed), and based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the PRDY signal is turned on. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). Based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of game media is interrupted due to a power outage during the execution of ball lending, the data of the number of unpaid items is not cleared at the time of subsequent power restoration, and the setting is performed based on Resuming the interrupted payout of game media and completing ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (2), when RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the number of unpaid items stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining number to be paid out). Even when the PRDY signal is in the ON state (because there is no game medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed in the previous) (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the unpaid number data stored in the RAM 21TM302 to be stored in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example of ball lending processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
FIG. 12-8 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the above-described clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Further, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with separate and independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  If the game clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the power supply is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. 21TM052a is turned off. Conversely, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized without initializing the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on to clear the game. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

  Next, FIG. 12-8 (2) relates to a process in a case where the payout is interrupted due to a power cutoff during the ball lending and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operation, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not resumed, and the payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  FIG. 12-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100). The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Also, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of power-on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. (There are remaining game media to be paid out), and based on the fact that the PRDY signal has been turned on, based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of game media is interrupted due to a power outage during the execution of ball lending, the data of the number of unpaid items is not cleared at the time of subsequent power restoration, and the setting is performed based on Resuming the interrupted payout of game media and completing ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clearing for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the backup data in the RAM 21TM302. When the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), and the PRDY signal is turned on. Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) Regardless of this, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (i.e., the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 has been executed, the unpaid number data stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized. Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing can be appropriately protected.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the unpaid number is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal of an open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Restriction on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of restricting award ball payout when the game machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-9. FIG. 12-9 shows a game control microcomputer 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between computer 100 and microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control. As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path on which the flowing prize balls are stored, so if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling.

  In the example of FIG. 12-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. Microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of game media related to any of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. Is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal based on the payout ball request signal, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. To send. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, during the period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is provided with each winning port. And the payout is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the prize ball payout control. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 then closes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a so that the clerk or the like at the game hall can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The provided game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. With both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a being in the closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning during the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Restart of prize ball payout after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the prize ball is being paid out, and thereafter the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 12-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been opened during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a not being in the open state (becoming closed).

  As shown in FIG. 12-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the award ball number command, and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), from a number-of-payouts counting switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Do not pay out game media. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). Upon detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the information in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid number storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

(Prizeball processing when power failure occurs (without shifting to the setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 11, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIG. 12-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is executed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After that, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, and after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 12-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 stopped because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is performing a predetermined process as a power-on process (after the power is turned on, without being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the serial connection shown in FIG. During the communication circuit setting process (a period until the execution of the step S21TM1480), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state where the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Until the execution of S21TM1480), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (Step S21TM3050 or Step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM has been cleared, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State, and the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid-number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are determined. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted by the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that the payout of the interrupted game media can be resumed, the payout of the prize ball can be completed.

(Award ball processing when power failure occurs (transition to setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 12-12 shows the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be described specifically. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 12-12, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been subjected to the RAM clear.

  As shown in FIG. 12-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing the predetermined process as the power-on process (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. ) Is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Is completed), and the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Let it.

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Carry out the work. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, and On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Since the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are stored). Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing executed in the previous step (i.e., the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example of prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
Next, FIG. 12-13 shows the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be described specifically. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operation, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 12 to 13, when the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium, the payout during the execution is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without dispensing, the dispensing is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been executed.

  As shown in FIG. 12-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100). The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing the predetermined process as the power-on process (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. ) Is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Also, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of power-on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 12A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is started based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the number of unpaid numbers is determined. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, and On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clearing for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the backup data in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) Regardless of this, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (i.e., the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the unpaid number is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal of an open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 detects that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, even if a prize is detected, the prize ball number command is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the winning ball number command is no longer received, thereby preventing the payout of payout balls.

(Output period of security signal and setting change corresponding signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. As described above, the security signal can notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of an illegal act, the detection of a game stop target error, and the like have been performed. Further, the security signal is output from the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started to the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the game proceeds to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. In the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070 shown in 12-2 (until NO is determined and the normal game process is executed), the state is turned ON.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is output from the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started to the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is performed (for example, FIG. In the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070 shown in 12-2 (until NO is determined and the normal game process is executed), the ON state is set. With this setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when the process shifts to the normal game process), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and thereafter, the RAM 102 is reset from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (1), when the power is turned on, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode with the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 12-1), A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the normal game process is started. Also, with the end of the setting change mode (accurately, at a timing of 50 ms after the setting change mode ends and the normal game process is performed), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, two pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (2), when the power is turned on, the RAM is cleared (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 12-1), but the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (Accurately, at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process), the state is turned off. The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) as shown in FIG. 12-15 (3). In this case, the OFF state is not set immediately after the setting change mode ends, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, the setting confirmation mode ends (exactly, the setting confirmation mode ends). (At the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game process).

  12-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. After the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the game is turned off at the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game processing), and thereafter (for example, after an elapse of 50 ms or more), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode. This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (2), if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is output when the power is turned on (RAM It is ON for 30 seconds from the time of clear execution).

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), but the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the security signal input period has not reached 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). That is, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that only the confirmation has been performed without being in a state where the setting value can be changed.

  That is, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the fact that the RAM may have been cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) but may not have shifted to the setting change mode may indicate that the hall computer or the like has not performed. If the security device is recognizable and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). In the case where the management device can recognize that (it is possible that only the confirmation has been performed without being in a state where the set value can be changed) and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, , It may have shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. As described above, it is possible to distinguish what control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the possibility that the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is always executed because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on (step S21TM3050). Or, step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is approximately +30 seconds during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  As described above, since the output period of the security signal is different between the case where the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode and the case where the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, each of the gaming machines can change the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change mode). Or, it becomes OFF state (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting check mode ended and the normal game process was started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. If the input period of the security signal is longer than the input period of the setting change corresponding signal by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and that the RAM has been cleared accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without RAM clear.

  As described above, when the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from different output terminals, the external device to which these signals are input causes a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the gaming machine. Has occurred, and that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and it is possible to specify which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the input period of the security signal.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the setting is confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). When the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510), the setting confirmation mode ends. Then, it is assumed that the process has shifted to the normal game process.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Even if less than 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was started, and the setting confirmation mode was terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off) and the process shifted to the normal game processing, at least a period of 50 ms or more The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned ON, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  Assuming that the period during which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are in the ON state is shorter than a predetermined period (in this example, 50 ms), the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize the transition to the mode. As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The external device can recognize that each pachinko gaming machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode having a pulse width of 100 ms. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on and then switched to the off state within less than 50 ms. When the number of pulses having a width of 100 ms corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period in which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) Cannot be recognized, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is incorrectly recognized. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, the external device side is set by turning on the setting change corresponding signal for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

  FIG. 12-16 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect device provided in the effect control board 12. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9, the first off-screen display 21TM101, the second off-screen display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display are provided on the lamp control board 14 in addition to the gaming effect lamp 9. A 21TM103 and a setting change state indicator 21TM104 are connected, each of which is constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED. All of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common emission color.

  The off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the first reserved storage number has been changed, that is, when a winning in the first starting winning opening has occurred (when the first reserved storage number has increased), and when the first special symbol has been changed. When the variable display is completed and the display result is determined (when the number of first reserved storages is reduced), the game control microcomputer 100 specifies the first retained storage number after the update from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen first suspension indicator 21TM101 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the first suspension storage number designated by the first suspension storage number designation command.

  For example, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. In addition, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. In addition, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. When the first reserved storage number specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are turned on and off.

  The off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 includes two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the second reserved storages, that is, when the winning in the second starting winning opening occurs (when the second reserved storage number increases), and the second special symbol. When the variable display is completed and the display result is determined (when the number of second reserved storages decreases), the game control microcomputer 100 specifies the second reserved storage number after the update from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen second suspension indicator 21TM102 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the second suspension storage number designated by the second suspension storage number designation command.

  For example, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. In addition, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. In addition, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. Then, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are turned on and off.

  The fourth symbol display 21TM103 includes two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a fourth symbol variable display device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the first special symbol variable display is started (ie, (Variation display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or lit (that is, the variation display is terminated), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a fourth symbol variable display device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11, and blinks at the timing when the second special symbol variable display is started (that is, the variable symbol). Display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or lit (that is, the variable display is completed), and the display result is derived.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command for designating that the first reserved storage number has been subtracted, a display result designation for designating a display result A command and a variation pattern command for designating a variation time of the special symbol, a variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the reception of the set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100; In addition, the change time of the first special symbol can be specified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the display result is determined, receive the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and perform the first special symbol. It is possible to specify that the variable display has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variable display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on in response to the reception of the symbol determination designation command (that is, the display result is determined). ). For example, if the display result of “outside” is specified by the display result specifying command, one of the light emitting devices is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of “big hit” is specified by the display result specifying command. In this case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, a second reserved storage number subtraction designation command for designating that the second reserved storage number has been subtracted, a display result designation for designating a display result A command and a variation pattern command for designating a variation time of the special symbol, a variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100 a set of commands; In addition, the change time of the second special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the display result is determined, based on the second special symbol. It is possible to specify that the variable display has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device on the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (ie, variable display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time designated by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command (that is, the display result is decided). ). For example, when the display result of “outside” is designated by the display result designation command, the other light emitting device is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of “big hit” is designated by the display result designation command. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The emission color of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 and the emission color of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 may be different. For example, the former emits blue light and the latter emits red light. You may make it do. In the fourth symbol display device 21TM103, the emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is made different from the emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, the former may be emitted in blue (the same emission color as the first off-screen first display 21TM101) and the latter may be emitted in red (the same emission color as the second off-screen display 21TM102). You may do it.

  Further, an image indicating the first number of reserved storages (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”) and an image indicating the second number of reserved storages (for example, an image of red numbers “0 to 4”) are displayed as images. The information may be displayed on the display device 5. In addition, when the image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a square image, is blinking (fluctuation) in white while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is out of order. Is an image that is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol fixing period, and is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol fixing period when the display result is a big hit), and an image of a fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square) Is blinking (fluctuating) in yellow during the period in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed in blue in the symbol determination period when the display result is out of order, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, an image that is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  The setting change state indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change state at the timing of receiving the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the effect control is performed in the setting change mode. The device 21TM104 is turned on. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 12B) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change state display 21TM104 is turned off. I do.

  The effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The status indicator 21TM104 is made to blink. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 12B) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change state display 21TM104 is turned off. I do.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the setting change mode (lighting state) and that it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (blinking state) by the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. Has become. Here, compared with the period from when the power is turned on to when the image display control on the image display device 5 is enabled by the display control unit 123, the light emission of each light emitting device is performed by the lamp control board 14 after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is very short. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 11-17, in the image display device 5, it is not possible to notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode and that the image display device 5 is being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (the image display device 123 displays the Even before the display control is enabled), the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104 can notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode and that the control is being performed in the setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible.

  In the effect control board 12, the game is not limited to the setting change state display 21TM104, but the first off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the second off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. By emitting light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the operation is being performed, it may be notified that the control is being performed in the setting change mode or the control in the setting confirmation mode. For example, it is controlled that the setting change mode is controlled by turning on all the LEDs that constitute the first off-screen display 21TM101, the second off-screen display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. It is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by making all the LEDs constituting the first off-screen display 21TM101 outside the screen, the second off-screen display 21TM102 outside the screen, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blink. May be notified.

  On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 operates the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the general-purpose hold display 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (for example, all are simultaneously turned on). ), It can be notified that the setting change mode is being controlled. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the CPU 103 operates the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the general-use hold display 25C, the first special symbol display 4A, and the second special display. The special symbol display device 4B and the ordinary symbol indicator 20 emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (and a light emission pattern different even when being controlled in the setting change mode). (For example, by making all of them blink at the same time), it can be informed that the setting control mode is being controlled.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 30TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 30TM will be described. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved display area 30TM101 for displaying the first reserved storage number (0 to 4 first reserved display 30TM001) and a second reserved storage number (0 to 4 second reserved display). A second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display are provided. The first hold display area 30TM101, the second hold display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen. The right side is the second reserved display area 30TM102.

  When the first reserved storage number is not 0, effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 30TM001 corresponding to the first reserved storage number in first reserved display area 30TM101. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the first hold display 30TM001 is controlled to the big hit game state. Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) for which the second reserved storage number is not 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). It is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, the first hold displays 30TM001 correspond to the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (from the right as viewed from the player). The start condition of the changed display is satisfied.

  Further, when the second reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a second reserved display 30TM002 corresponding to the second reserved storage number in the second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, the starting condition (for example, winning in the second starting winning opening) is satisfied, but the starting condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed, and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) for which the second reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold displays 30TM002 correspond to the active display area 30TM103 in order (from the left as viewed from the player). The start condition of the changed display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 indicates that after the start condition (for example, winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the big hit game This is information corresponding to the special symbol variable display (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved storages is not zero.

  In addition, the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (left side as viewed from the player) is an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and stores the first hold storage number (0-4 sub-hold displays 30TM004). A sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 which are different from the active display area 30TM103 and display the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is to be displayed at the time of the start winning (when a winning in the first starting winning opening occurs), and displays the sub-hold display area 30TM104 in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. A number of sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to one hold storage number are displayed, and a sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, in the sub-hold display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the big hit game state is controlled). And the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). In addition, the secondary active display 30TM005 is controlled after the start condition (for example, the winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied and the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the big hit game state is performed). This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-hold displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, the fluctuations corresponding to the sub-hold display 30TM004 are arranged in an order close to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (from the right as viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13A, the sub-reserve display 30TM004 is a star-shaped outline, which is different from the first reservation display 30TM001 (round or triangular display). The sub-hold display 30TM004 is smaller in size than the first hold display 30TM001 and therefore less noticeable, and has low visibility for the player. The sub-active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (circular display or triangular display). The secondary active display 30TM005 is smaller in size than the active display 30TM003, and therefore less noticeable, and has low visibility for the player.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the secondary active A sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. In this manner, as information corresponding to one variable display (common variable display) being executed, information in different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  Also, in response to the first number of storages being four, four first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, and four sub-hold displays are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed, information in different modes, that is, the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 are displayed. That is, one first hold display 30TM001, a variable display (hold storage) corresponding to the first first hold display 30TM001, and one sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the common variable display (hold storage) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

  In this manner, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to a common variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, The effects using the hold display can be diversified to enhance the interest. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the active variable display (variable display of the first special symbol and variable design) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the effects using the active display and improve the interest.

  Here, as described later, if it is determined in the determination at the time of the start winning that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, The secondary hold display area 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104. In addition, while the active display area 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the sub-active display area 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105, and indicates that the sub-active display area 30TM005 is to be displayed. Information (a rectangular frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 13A) is not displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of the start winning. The first change effect refers to a first hold display 30TM001 or an active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning, and a special mode different from the normal mode (white circle display in this example). (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) This is an announcement effect that is displayed in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round display). In addition, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, a white star display) in which the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning is set. The announcement effect is displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star display).

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart illustrating the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process illustrated in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 firstly sets a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a It is confirmed whether or not one (1) reserve storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is to be made, and the type of the big hit is determined among the winning determination results. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big hit is to be made based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and determines the big hit type when the big hit is made, and designates the result of the determination. Output the specified command. The fluctuation category command is an effect control command indicating a fluctuation pattern determination result among the prize-winning determination results. The CPU 103 determines whether or not to reach a normal reach or a super reach based on the random number for variation pattern type determination extracted at the time of the start winning, and outputs a variation category command for designating the determination result. I do. The first reserved storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved storage number has been increased by one.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. I do. If one set of start winning commands has not been newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends.

  If one set of start winning commands has been newly received, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the change prohibition flag has been set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag has been set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set at least based on the determination that the first change effect is to be executed. If the change prohibition flag has been set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is to be executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is to be executed and the final display mode. It is determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 13C) (step S30TM1030).

  By executing the processing of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processing after step S30TM1030 is executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is performed. Alternatively, it is configured to be able to execute the second change effect.

  FIG. 13C is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 30TM003, “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode” ”And“ golden aspects ”can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode” Can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Of these, "no display" indicates that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "losing" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "losing"), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) becomes the normal mode (white circular display) at a rate of 31%, and the special mode (white color mode) at a rate of 4%. (Triangle display), a blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 18%, a green mode (green round display) at a rate of 21%, and a red mode (red round display) at a rate of 16% ), And becomes a golden mode (golden round display) at a rate of 10%. In other words, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning prize is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69. % Will be executed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting winning (new first hold storage). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20%. At a rate of 25%, the color becomes red, and at a rate of 35%, the color becomes gold. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. Will be.

  As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the rate of the jackpot is higher than when the first change effect is not executed. In addition, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 becomes the golden mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes highest. As shown in FIG. 13A, regarding the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of a normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. .

  In addition, as shown in a change pattern of the first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. It may be. Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than that. To change. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 13A, the rate at which the special mode is selected as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the rate at which the other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5 described later, the rate at which the special mode is included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the rate at which other modes are included. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit as compared with the case where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode is more highly expected. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “out”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed at the rate of 70%, but are displayed at the rate of 30%. The ratio in which the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 1%. In other words, the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is determined at the time of the start winning is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is determined at the time of the starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), The secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed at the rate of 40%, but are displayed at the rate of 60%. The ratio in which the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio in which the final display mode is the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 25%. That is, the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning is displayed at a rate of 60%, which corresponds to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the rate of the big hit is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the rate of the big hit is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. In addition, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes highest. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), regarding the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Also, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode is a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub-hold display 30TM004 before the sub-active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display with a higher degree of expectation than that. It changes to an aspect. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second It may be determined to execute a change effect (display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 and make the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 different from the normal mode).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. (2-2) It is determined that the first change effect is to be executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is normally In some cases).

  The effect control CPU 120 determines (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to the normal mode), and to execute the second change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the The sub-active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 may be determined to be different from the normal mode.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute the (4-1) first change effect, and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. (4-2) It is determined that the first change effect is not executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is normally In some cases).

  In the process of step S30TM1030, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, (4-1) and ( In the case of any of 4-2), the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed in a normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start prize (first hold storage) does not change from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed. Does not change from the normal mode to another mode (the change patterns 101 and 201 when the final display mode is the “normal mode” shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5). 301, 401).

  In the case of the above (4-2), although the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the corresponding sub-active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (see FIG. 13-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, (1), (2-1), and (2) -2) and (3), the change pattern of the change effect is determined as described below.

  If it is determined to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, if the above (1) is satisfied, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined on the basis of the number of stored memories (the first number of stored memories after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the determined final display mode of the active display 30TM003 ( 13-4 and FIG. 13-5), the updated first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command), and the determined secondary active display 30TM005. Based on the final display mode, the change pattern of the second change effect is determined (see FIG. 13-6).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the first change effect is to be executed and the second change effect is not to be executed (YES in step S30TM1110), ie, the above (2-1) and (2-2) If any of them is satisfied, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved storage number (the first retained storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command) and the finalized active display 30TM003 are determined. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5). In the case of the above (2-2), the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, but the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the corresponding sub-active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (see FIG. 13-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, if it corresponds to the above (3), the process proceeds to step S30. In S30TM1210, based on the updated first reserved storage number (first reserved storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined secondary active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 13-6).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3) above) If this is the case, a prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In the case where neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is performed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed (in the case of (4-2) above). If so, also set the look-ahead counter.

  The value (the value specified by the first reserved memory number designation command) corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the winning start is set in the look-ahead counter, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Every time (each time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the prefetch counter is decremented by one. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter is decremented every time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage used as the determination target at the time of the start winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the fluctuation display serving as the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect (or, although the second change effect is not executed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed). (Variation display) is executed.

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, it sets a change prohibition flag (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period in which the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start winning is generated, the answer to the above-described step S30TM1020 is YES, and the new start winning (new first hold storage) is handled. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the change display targeted for the first change effect ends.

  FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the first holding storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the n-th first holding display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the first holding display area 30TM101. (A timing at the time of a winning prize), (ii) the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start prize is shifted to a higher position (on the side of the active display area 30TM103) in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed). ), Display information (suspended display or Active display) might be displayed in a different manner from the normal manner.

  In FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, what kind of display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each of the timings (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. This indicates whether the display mode is set. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white round display, and “special” indicates a special mode that is a white triangle display. Here, “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue round display, and “red” indicates a red mode that is a red round display.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the active shift.

  In the description of FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, the start-up prize at the time of the start winning prize). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, if the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Also, a special mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift. In (), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the special mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, and 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a special manner at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Also, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402 described later) In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode. Further, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the blue mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, and 105, respectively.

  Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Also, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402 to be described later). In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode. Further, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the green mode.

  When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a red form at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Also, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402 described later). In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the red mode. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405 described later). 412), the active display 30TM003 remains in the red mode after the active shift.

  When the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107, respectively.

  Here, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the golden mode. Also, the golden mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204 to be described later, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402). In (), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the golden mode. In addition, the gold mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the golden mode. In addition, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the color mode is the red mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405 described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red mode to the golden mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two holdings shown in FIG. 13-4 (B) when the first holding number stored in the first holding number storage area is “2”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 201, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift of the active shift is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, a change pattern 201, a change pattern 202, a change pattern 202, or a change pattern according to a determination result at the time of starting winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 203 and 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift of the active shift is not changed. This is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at a timing. The change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display to be notified changes in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without a change pattern remains unchanged at special embodiment the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, which is a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. In the change pattern 205, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the notice object into a blue form, and the change pattern 206 displays the first hold display of the notice object in a special form at the time of the start winning, and then gives a notice at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the special mode and the first hold display of the target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 208 is that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a special manner at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the notice object to a red form. The change pattern 210 is such that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the notice is given at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode and the first hold display of the target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 211 is the first display of the target in the start winning. After the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the live shift, and the change pattern 212 is that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reservations shown in FIG. 13-5 (C) when the first reservation storage number stored in the first reservation storage number storage area is “3”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 301 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 301, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the reference numbers 302. In the change pattern 302, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, a change pattern 301, a change pattern 302, a change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. In the change pattern 303, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the change, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to the blue mode and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. In the pattern 305, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, and 310, respectively. In the change pattern 306, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of 、, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notification target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notification of the target is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. A change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue mode, After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the change pattern 308 does not change the first hold display of the notice object in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second time The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red form at the time of the active shift. The change pattern 309 is a start winning. Sometimes, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. (1) A change pattern that does not change the hold display in the red mode and does not change the first hold display to be notified even in the active shift timing in the red mode. In the change pattern 310, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a red form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, and 310, respectively.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for four reservations shown in FIG. 13-5 (D) when the first reservation storage number stored in the first reservation storage number storage area is “4”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 401 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 401, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the third hold shift, and the active shift timing is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 402. In the change pattern 402, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display is not changed in the special mode.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, a change pattern 401, a change pattern 402, a change pattern 402, or a change pattern according to a determination result at the time of a start winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403 and 404, respectively. In the change pattern 403, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is also changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 is a change pattern in which the hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is such that the first hold display of the preview target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the change of the preview target is performed at the timing of the first hold shift. (1) The hold display is not changed in the blue mode and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift three times. Without change from the first hold display blue aspects notice object in the timing of the hold shift, a change pattern remains unchanged blue embodiments the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403, 404, and 405 to 412, respectively. In the change pattern 405, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the active shift. The first hold display is a change pattern for changing the first hold display to the red mode, and the change pattern 406 is such that the first hold display of the preview target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first notification target is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the time of the third hold shift is changed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the notice object in the blue mode. After displaying the first hold display of the target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notification target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notification target is performed at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to a blue mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 408 is a first, second, and third hold after displaying a first hold display of a notice target in a blue mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 409 is a start winning. Sometimes, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode after the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object remains in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 411 is a change pattern that is not changed. The change pattern 411 changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue form at the time of the start winning. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice of the notice object at the time of the start winning. After the hold display is displayed in red, the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift Also grayed is without changing the change pattern of the red aspect the first hold display notice object.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, and 412, respectively. ing.

  FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. In the case where the first hold storage number has become n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and it is determined to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, (i 1) The first to n-th sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to the first number n of the first storage to be stored are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed. The timing (timing at the time of winning a prize) displayed in the active display area 30TM105, (ii) the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting prize is positioned higher in the fluctuation order in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-active display area 30TM105). Side) (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) At the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the moving prize is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the starting prize is displayed), the display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize. Information (pending display or active display) may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 13-6, for each change pattern, at each of the timings (i) to (iii), what kind of display mode is displayed for the display information (the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 13-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star display, “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star display, and “ “Red” indicates a red mode that is a red star display.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 13-6 (A) when the first hold number stored in the first hold number storage area is “1”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 601 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Note that in the description of FIG. 13-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, (The sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed.)

  Here, the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and when the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, the change pattern 601, the change result according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 603 is the start pattern. This is a change pattern in which, when a prize is won, the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, if the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, a change pattern 701, a change pattern 801, and a change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. In addition, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

  When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, which is a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 603, 604, and 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which a sub-hold display of a notice object is displayed in a blue form at the time of a start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to a red form at an active shift timing. The change pattern 605 is a start pattern. This is a change pattern in which, when a prize is won, the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. When the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906 described later). -912), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two holdings shown in FIG. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 701 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 701 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and is also changed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be notified in the normal mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern 701, the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 703 and 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, but is changed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern for changing the sub-hold display of the notice target into a blue mode, and the change pattern 703 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and thereafter, at the timing of the first hold shift, This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display is changed to the blue mode and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the display, the auxiliary hold display of the target for notice is displayed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. A change pattern remains unchanged at like.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 703, 704, and 705 to 708, respectively. The change pattern 705 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, change the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the sub-hold display of the notice object at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 706 is a change pattern for changing the sub-hold display in red to the red mode. The change pattern 706 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold to be notified at the first hold shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode and the sub-hold display of the notification target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 707 is the sub-hold display of the notification target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning. After the display, at the timing of the first hold shift, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed to a red mode, and the active shift The change pattern 708 is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice object in the red mode in the case of the timing, and the change pattern 708 indicates the timing of the first hold shift after the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of active shift.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three holdings shown in FIG. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 801 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 801, the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the secondary hold display of the notification target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to 802 to change pattern 804, respectively. The change pattern 802 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 803 is the After the sub-hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold to be notified at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift is performed. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the display is not changed while keeping the blue color. After displayed in blue manner, first time, for the second time hold shift, a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display notice object at the timing of the active shift remains blue aspect.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, the change pattern 801 in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 803, 804, and 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, change the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the timing of the second hold shift. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the preview target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the preview target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. At the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue mode, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing. The change pattern 808 is the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the red mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the active shift, the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for four holdings shown in FIG. 13D when the first number of holdings stored in the first holding number storage area is “4”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 901 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift, and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that is not changed.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the respective patterns 902 to 905. The change pattern 902 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to the blue mode, and the auxiliary hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern that is not changed, and the change pattern 904 displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after being displayed in the mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change patterns 901 to 905, and the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905 in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination values are assigned to the change patterns 906 to 912, respectively. The change pattern 906 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of the third hold shift, the secondary hold display of the advance notice is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift, and the secondary hold display of the advance notice is red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 is a change pattern that is not changed as it is, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, and without changing the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, the timing of the third hold shift The sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 908 is the sub-hold display of the notice object at the time of the start winning. Is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, At the timing of the third hold shift, the timing of the active shift is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 909 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning. After that, at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, the auxiliary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and The sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the eye hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 910 is a start winning. Sometimes, the auxiliary hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the blue mode, and then the auxiliary hold display of the advance notice remains unchanged in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the secondary hold display of the advance target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display is changed to the red mode, and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 911 is the target of the notice at the time of the start winning. Is displayed in blue mode, and the sub-hold display to be notified is red at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 912 is the change of the notice target at the time of the start winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display is displayed in the red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the rate at which the first change effect in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of the big hit is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  As described above, in the lower part of the screen, the first change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 having high visibility is executed at a high frequency, and thereby the player with respect to the notice effect is performed. The interest of can be maintained. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 having low visibility, the ratio of the big hit depends on whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed at the top of the screen. It will be noted whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, since the big hit expectation in the case where the second change effect is executed is higher than the first change effect, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, whether or not the display mode changes. You will also pay attention to

  In the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or secondary active display at the top of the screen) are displayed. 30TM005) is different in size and shape. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003) is displayed in a circular shape, and the other icon (the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. This clarifies the characteristics of each icon so that the player can easily grasp the difference (being different types of display information). Moreover, the effects produced by the icons corresponding to the variable display can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, as in the relationship between the first hold display 30TM001 in the red mode displayed at the bottom of the screen and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red mode displayed at the top of the screen, a common display color corresponding to the common variable display is displayed. Icons (note that the icons differ in round and star shapes) may be displayed at the same time. Thereby, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display region 30TM101 and the sub-hold display region 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation degree regarding the target variable display.

  Further, as in the relationship between the red active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen, an icon of a common display color corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. (However, different icons for the round and star shapes may be displayed at the same time.) This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 to 13-6, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode). The combination of the first holding display 30TM001 and the red holding sub-holding display 30TM004 has the highest jackpot expectation), so that the player is interested in both holding display modes and displays the holding display. It is possible to enhance the interest in the effect of changing the mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13C, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red display in the red mode). Since the combination of the sub-active displays 30TM005 has the highest jackpot expectation), the player becomes interested in both active display modes, and the effect of changing the display mode of the active display is enhanced. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the first change effect is displayed). (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is taken over during the active shift) or the display color is changed to a display color with higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13-6, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is taken over during the active shift) or the display color is changed to a display color with higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the secondary hold display 30TM004 changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility has more display modes than the sub-active display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 to 13-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is changed when the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 with low visibility is changed. Are provided more than the change patterns. In this way, by changing the type of effect that can be performed and the effect pattern in accordance with the visibility of the active display and the hold display, the first change effect and the second effect can be prevented while preventing the effect from being excessively complicated. We are trying to appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change production and the second change production)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-7 to 13-9. FIG. 13-7 is a time chart when executing both the first change effect and the second change effect. FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9 illustrate both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when executing.

  First, FIG. 13-8 (1) shows a state in which the first hold storage number is 3 and the display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is changed on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-7). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the middle left and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-7), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize has occurred in the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined (the gold mode in this example). And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the execution of the second change effect is determined, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol (first special symbol). Also, based on the fact that the first number of storages is four, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in a normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag based on the decision to execute the first change effect as shown in (T2) of FIG. 13-7 and FIG. 13-8 (2). Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold storage) generated thereafter is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, after the first hold display 30TM001 as the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 as the target of the second change effect is displayed). ), And a period (a period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 13-7) until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) ends.

  Accordingly, when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in a normal mode corresponding to the start winning is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode). Further, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start winning is generated within the prohibited period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 and the second hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to a variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-8 (3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first suspension display 30TM001 displayed in the suspension display area 30TM101 is shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is deleted. Then, the sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. In this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-8 (5).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1 The sub-active display area 30TM105 side by side. It was collected displayed in the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first hold display of the notice object is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue circle display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (the sub-hold display 30TM004b which is a blue star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) and the blue mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are erased. 30TM004b (blue star shape) Shown)) shifts the display one by one sub active display area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (8) (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first hold display of the notice object is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the sub-hold display 30TM004c which is a red star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-9 (9).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (10) (at timing T6 shown in FIG. 13-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c in red mode (red circle display)) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105. Of the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004c in red mode (red star display)) is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. Shift display, and in the image display device 5 To start the display of the change.

  After the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect), FIG. In the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the period from T7 to T8 of 13-7. A change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. When changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

  If the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period from T7 to T8 in FIG. Vary to the mode. For example, when the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 determined at the time of the start winning is a red mode and the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in a blue mode immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, The sub-active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11) (at timing T8 in FIG. 13-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stops in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and a reach effect is displayed in which the character “REACH !!” is displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are turned off, so that the visibility of the reach effect is prevented from being reduced and the interest is not reduced. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 13-7).

  As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which have at least a part of the display region common to the region where the reach effect is executed, are not displayed. On the other hand, as for the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display that are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, the period during which the reach effect is executed can be continuously displayed at the top of the screen. The player can visually recognize these. This allows the player to easily grasp the number of stored reservations even during the execution of the reach effect, and also to grasp the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in a case where it is determined that only the first change effect is performed at the time of the start winning is described with reference to FIGS. 13-10 to 13-12. FIG. 13-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 13-11 and 13-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image.

  First, FIG. 13-11 (1) shows a state in which the first hold storage number is 3 and the display pattern of the left middle right decoration pattern is changed on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-10). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-10), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize has occurred in the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (the gold mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. , And the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is not executed). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not to be displayed by the determination at the time of the start winning, Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Further, based on the decision to execute the first change effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 13-10 and FIG. 13-11 (2). Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold storage) generated thereafter is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the period from when the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed until the change display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 ends. This is a period (a period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 13-10).

  Accordingly, when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in a normal mode corresponding to the start winning is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode). Further, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start winning is generated within the prohibited period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of storages to be held is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 is a target to be notified by the first change effect. Is a suspended display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first suspended display 30TM001 displayed in the suspended display area 30TM101 is shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (4) (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (5).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device is displayed. At 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b which is a blue circular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (7).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device is displayed. At 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts the change display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first reserved display 30TM001c which is a red circular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c in red mode (red circle display)) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next fluctuation is displayed on the image display device 5. Start display.

  After the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect), FIG. In the period from T7 to T8 of 13-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display area 30TM103.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (11) (at timing T8 in FIG. 13-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stops in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and a reach effect is displayed in which the character “REACH !!” is displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 become non-display. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 13-10).

  As described above, when it is determined that only the first change effect is to be executed at the time of the start winning, a new start winning effect is required until the variable display targeted for the first change effect ends. Is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start winning is not executed. As described above, after the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is temporarily changed in the first hold display area 30TM101 having high visibility (after the mode is changed from the normal mode), a new start winning is generated thereafter. Even in this case, by preventing the second change effect based on the new start winning prize from being executed in the sub-hold display region 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is focused on the first change effect with high visibility, The effect of complicating the effect due to the execution of the second change effect for the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the one change effect is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, if a new starting prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example in which the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning prize is prohibited has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Is displayed in a different manner), when a new start winning is generated, the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start winning can be executed, but at that time, The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  In addition, after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), if a new start winning is generated, not only the second change effect but also another notice The execution of the effect may be restricted. For example, the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display based on the new start winning prize is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the variable display is executed (for example, the first hold storage number is changed from 3 to 0). Along with the subtraction by one, “3”, “2”, “1”, and “0” are displayed). The countdown effect may not be executed. Further, the background change effect of changing the background image to the special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example in which the execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning prize has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is normally If a new start prize is generated during a period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but the new start prize can be executed. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is displayed. As the display mode remains unchanged at the normal mode) as it may be.

(Modifications regarding the first change production and the second change production)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift displayed in the second change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed in response to the execution of the first hold action effect acting on the first hold display 30TM001, and the mode is acted on the sub-hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed in accordance with the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

  FIG. 13-13, FIG. 13-14, and FIG. 13-15 are specific examples in the case where the first holding effect effect is executed in the first change effect, and the sub-hold effect effect is executed in the second change effect.

  First, FIG. 13-13 (1) shows a state in which the first display storage number is 3 and the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbol. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative symbol is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Assume that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined (the gold mode in this example). And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the execution of the second change effect is determined, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Also, based on the fact that the first number of storages is four, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in a normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 and the second hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to a variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. In this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, when effect display CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the first suspended display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first reserved display 30TM001a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, effect control CPU 120 determines that the first holding effect effect is to be executed, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to execute the first pending action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first pending action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 13C, an effect is performed in which the character A appears and throws the ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001 to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (5), in response to executing the first holding action effect (action effect A), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice target from the normal mode to the special mode. The mode is changed to a mode (in this example, the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold displays (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-displays displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 are displayed. The active display 30TM005 is deleted, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side by side. And the image display device 5 To start the next variable display.

  Here, when effect display control CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the first suspended display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b) which is a blue circle display. Along with this, effect control CPU 120 determines that the first holding effect effect is to be executed, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is determined that the first hold action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears will be executed.

  Further, when effect display CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example). Recognizes that the display is changed to the sub reserve display 30TM004b) which is a blue star display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-hold effect effect, and determines the type of the sub-hold effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to execute the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a) in which the character a appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 13-13 (7), an effect is performed in which a character B appears and throws a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001a to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first reserved display 30TM001a to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice target from a special mode to a blue color in response to executing the first hold effect effect (action effect B). The mode is changed to a mode (in this example, the first reserved display 30TM001b which is a blue circular display).

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (9), an effect is performed in which the character a appears and the balloon flies toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified. As shown in FIGS. 13-14 (10) and 13-15 (11), the balloon that the character “a” has flown toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon arrives at the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes to a balloon shape (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (13) and (14), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode in response to the execution of the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a). To the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold displays (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-displays displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 are displayed. The active display 30TM005 is deleted, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) and the blue mode sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star display) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are displayed. )) One by one secondary active table Shifted displayed in the area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, when effect display control CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on change pattern 407 of the first change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the first suspended display to be notified is changed from a blue mode to a red mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c) which is a red circle display. Along with this, effect control CPU 120 determines that the first holding effect effect is to be executed, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is determined that the first hold action effect in which the character C appears (action effect C) is executed.

  Further, when effect display control CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (this example). Recognizes that the display is changed to a red star display 30TM004c). Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-hold effect effect, and determines the type of the sub-hold effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect b) in which the character b appears has been determined to be executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (17), an effect in which the character C appears and throws the ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001b to be notified is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first reserved display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the blue mode to the red color in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect C). The mode is changed to the mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display).

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (19), an effect is performed in which a character b appears and a balloon is flown toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified. As shown in FIGS. 13-15 (20) and 13-15 (21), the balloon that the character b has flew toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b is changed to a balloon shape (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target into a blue mode in response to the execution of the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect b). To a red mode (in this example, a red star display 30TM004c which is a red star display). .

  As described above, the first holding action effect executed when changing the mode of the first hold display and the sub-holding effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub-hold display are different in the effect mode. Thereby, the interest due to the existence of a plurality of types of hold corresponding displays (first hold display and sub-hold display) can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-15, an effect in which a character appears and performs an action on an icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode and the character A appears and performs an active action effect of performing an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). In addition, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect of performing the action of causing the character “a” to fly the balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005 is performed. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, the active action effect performed when the mode of the active display is changed and the sub-active action effect performed when the mode of the sub-active display is changed are different from each other. Can be further improved by the presence of the fluctuation-compatible display (active display and sub-active display).

  In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution ratio of the second change effect may be different depending on the current setting value (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the rate at which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher when the set value is higher (4 to 6) than when the set value is lower (1 to 3). Alternatively, the ratio at which the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio at which the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 themselves are displayed) may be set high. Also, as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, three times). The rate at which the change pattern is selected may be high, and the rate at which the change color of the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is large (for example, two) may be high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. However, as described above, the display mode of the active display during the active shift is the final display mode. Is different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility of change. There are a success mode and a failure mode in the change suggestion effect. In the example shown below, when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode change is performed. When the suggested effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 differs from the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift and the final display mode of the active display determined when the start winning has occurred when performing the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display. In this case, the active change effect and the change suggestion effect are executed during the execution of the variable display, so that the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode when starting the variable display. FIGS. 13 to 16 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the table for determining the change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are respectively assigned to a special mode, a blue mode, a green mode, a red mode, and a gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "o" in Fig. 13-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is performed. ing.

  When the active display at the time of the active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13A, the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode is designed so that the change pattern 011 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is two, of which one success mode is one and one failure mode is one. The change pattern 011 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to activate. This is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is three times, of which the success mode is two times and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 012, the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display pattern is changed to a blue mode, and then a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed to change the active display in the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change It is a change pattern that changes the active display to a blue mode by executing a suggestion effect.

  In the case where the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is four, of which three are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 014, the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to a blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode. The change pattern 015 is a change pattern. After the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a change mode suggestion for a failed mode. The active display without change from blue aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display in green mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is five, of which four are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. Changing the display to a blue mode, then performing a change suggestion effect of a successful mode to change the active display to a green mode, and then performing a change mode suggestion of a successful mode to change the active display to a red mode, Thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the red mode without changing the active mode. The change pattern 017 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, and then displays the change mode of the successful mode. To change the active display to the special mode, and then perform the change suggestion effect of the successful mode, The active display is changed to the blue mode, the active display is changed to the green mode after that, and the active display is changed to the green mode, and the active display is changed to the green mode thereafter. This is a change pattern that changes the active display to the red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the successful mode after that.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is five, of which five are successful and zero are failure modes. In the change pattern 018, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. Changing the display to a blue mode, then performing a change suggestion effect of a successful mode to change the active display to a green mode, and then performing a change mode suggestion of a successful mode to change the active display to a red mode, After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

  If the active display at the time of the active shift is in the special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13B, when the final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a 100% probability in the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is two, of which one is a successful mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is three, of which two are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in the special mode at the time of the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. A display pattern is changed to a green mode, and thereafter, a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed, and the active display is a change pattern in which the green mode is not changed. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode during the active shift. Thereafter, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change is performed. It is a change pattern which changes an active display to a green form by performing a suggestion effect.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is four, of which three are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to a green mode, and then a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern. After the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to the green mode, and then perform a change mode suggestion of the failure mode, Without changing the active display stays green aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display red manner.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is four, of which four are the success modes and zero are the failure modes. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. A change in which the display is changed to a green mode, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed thereafter to change the active display to a red mode, and thereafter, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a gold mode. It is a pattern.

  If the active display at the time of the active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is two, of which one is a successful mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in a green state.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is three, of which two are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to a red mode, and then a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode, and thereafter, the success mode change is performed. This is a change pattern in which a suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is three, of which three are the success modes and zero are the failure modes. In the change pattern 034, after displaying the active display in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and thereafter, a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed to change the active display to a golden mode.

  When the active display at the time of the active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13D, the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode is set so that the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is one, of which one is a successful mode and zero is a failure mode. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in the red mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, during one variable display period (in this example, the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, so that the reach is performed after the variable display is started. During the period until the state is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, in particular, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the more the color changes to the display color with high expectation of big hit. The percentage increases.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the n-th change suggestion effect has been executed, the ratio of the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect being executed increases as the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode up to that time increases. It is configured as follows. For example, at the stage when the second change suggestion effect is executed (in the case of n = 2), the third change suggestion effect is always executed if both of the success modes are performed. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies to the case where n = 3 and the case where n = 4. As described above, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the larger the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect executed during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the establishment of the reach state, the larger the same fluctuation. During the display period (within the period from the start of the variable display to the time when the reach state is established), the rate of execution of the next change suggestion effect is high. Attention will be paid to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed, thereby improving the interest.

  In the present embodiment, as the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] within one variable display period, the big hit expectation is increased. The rate of change to a display mode with a high degree is high. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is に は when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In this case, it is 2/3, when the final display mode is a green mode, 3/4, when the final display mode is a red mode, 4/5, and when the final display mode is a gold mode. If so, it is 5/5. As described above, the larger the ratio of the number of executions of the success suggestion effect / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect], the higher the rate of change of the active display to the display mode with high jackpot expectation. Will also pay attention to the relationship between the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect and the number of times of execution of the change suggestion of the success mode, which can improve interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed is larger, the rate of change to the display mode having a higher jackpot expectation is higher. Specifically, the number of consecutive success mode change suggestion effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and is 1 when the final display mode is the green mode. 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. Thereby, the player is interested in whether or not the success suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed, and how many times the effect is indicated.

  Further, in this example, when the final display mode has the same display color, a change pattern having a larger number of consecutive success mode change suggestion effects is likely to be selected. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the rate of selection of the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is higher than that of the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the case of the green mode, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (two continuous). 014 (three continuous) is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of the red mode, the change pattern 016 (four continuous) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (three continuous). As described above, even when the same display color is finally obtained, the effect of suggesting the change of the success mode is easily continuous, so that the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect, based on the change pattern shown in FIGS. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. As the types of change suggestion effects, change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

  If the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect at the (n + 1) th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 [FIG. Successful mode, next stage effect execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, next effect execution is performed], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the case of the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change suggestion effect to be executed for the nth time is a success mode and does not execute the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. Success mode, no next stage execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the case of the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change suggestion effect executed for the nth time is a failure mode and executes the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect. Failure mode, next stage effect execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, next effect execution is performed], the character A has 37%, the character B has 32%, the character C has 30%, the character D has 1%, and the character E has 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a failure mode and does not execute the (n + 1) -th time change suggestion effect. Failure mode, next stage no execution] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no next effect execution], the character A is 35%, the character B is 30%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 5%, and the character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the n-th and the (n + 1) -th change suggesting effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the n-th change-inducing effect, and all of the characters A to E are selected in the (n + 1) -th change suggesting effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears in the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears in the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1 There is a possibility that a change suggestion effect A in which the character A similar to the n-th character appears in the third time. According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears is less likely to be a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of being a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a probability of being a success mode of 100%, but the probability of executing the next change suggestion effect is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is low, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, When the character D is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is high, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the current change suggestion effect is the last).

  As described above, since the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the mode with a high jackpot expectation differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player will pay attention to which type of character appears.

  It should be noted that the effect type is not limited to the effect types shown in FIGS. 13 to 17. For example, an effect type may be provided in which the display mode of the active display changes at a low rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is low. An effect type may be provided in which the rate of change in the display mode of display is high and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18 to 13-20. In the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 13-18, 13-19 (9) to (12), and FIG. 13-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the golden mode at the time of start winning. This is an example in which the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the active display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 018. . 13-18 and FIGS. 13-19 (9), (10), and (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the green mode when the start winning is achieved. And a case where the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode and the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014 when the variable display based on the start winning is started. It is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears regarding the first change suggestion effect is to be executed, and based on the fact that the second change suggestion effect is executed. The change suggestion effect A of the success mode has been determined to be executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the second change suggestion effect has been determined, and the third change suggestion effect has been executed. It is determined to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C appears in the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time is determined. It is determined that the success suggestion effect C is performed based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D, and the character D climbs with respect to the fourth change suggestion effect. Has been determined to execute the change suggestion effect D, and the change suggestion effect D of the success mode has been determined to be executed based on the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it has been decided to execute a change suggestion effect E of a success mode in which the character E appears in the effect.

  In FIG. 13-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white circular display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes the variation display of the decoration pattern in the middle left and right. It shows the state where it is.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect A in a successful mode in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (1), a character A appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character A has hit active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image that reminds that the active display has exploded. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (3), in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect, active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) in a special mode is displayed in active display region 30TM103. .

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change suggestion effect B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character B has hit active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (6), in response to the end of the second change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003b (blue circular display) in a blue mode. You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes a success suggestion change suggestion effect C. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (7), an effect image is displayed in which the character C appears from the right side of the screen, and the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b. As shown in FIG. 13-18 (8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character C has hit the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (9), in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect, a green mode active display 30TM003d (green circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change suggestion effect D. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (10), an effect image is displayed in which the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 13-19 (11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character D has hit active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (12), in response to the end of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003c in red mode (red circular display). You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change effect E. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which a transparent member (a glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 has a crack is displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a mode in which the range of the crack is enlarged is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (15), an image (screen cracking image 30TM210) of a mode in which the transparent member forming the screen of the image display device 5 is broken is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image is displayed in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E has hit the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (17), in response to the completion of the fifth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003e (golden circular display) in the golden mode. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (18), the screen broken image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 13-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol The reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “7”) is stopped is established in the display area, and the text “REACH !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). An effect is performed. Here, at the timing when the reach is established as described above, the active display 30TM003e in the golden mode is not displayed, and the square frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also not displayed. The non-displayed information is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be a green mode at the time of start winning. This is an example in which the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the active display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 014. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears regarding the first change suggestion effect is to be executed, and based on the fact that the second change suggestion effect is executed. The change suggestion effect A of the success mode has been determined to be executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the second change suggestion effect has been determined, and the third change suggestion effect has been executed. It is determined to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C appears in the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time is determined. It is determined that the change suggestion effect C of the success mode is executed based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D, and the character D climbs up with respect to the fourth change suggestion effect. It changes suggested effect decided to run a D, and it is assumed that the fifth variation suggest effect is decided to execute the changes suggested effect D failure mode based on the not executed for.

  The effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) illustrated in FIGS. 13-18 (1) to 13-19 (9) are the same as the effect examples of the change pattern 018 described above, and will be described. Are omitted, and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D in the failure mode in response to the fourth change suggestion effect execution timing. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (10), an effect image is displayed in which the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 13-19 (20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character D did not hit active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the green active display 30TM003d is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the above-mentioned effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed. Instead, the character D does not throw and hit. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect ends, the active display area 30TM103 continuously displays the green-state active display 30TM003d. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (22), a reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “4”) is stopped in the left symbol display region and the right symbol display region is established, and “reach! Is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach state is established, the active display area 30TM103 is not displayed, so that the green-state active display 30TM003d is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) to 13-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state in which the image display device 5 is continuously performing the variable display of the left middle right decorative pattern. A change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. When the execution of the predetermined number of change suggestion effects is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display region and the right symbol display region to establish the reach state. That is, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggesting effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the left middle right decorative pattern, changes the direction of the variable display, and changes the reach state. It is not established. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the change suggestion effect is performed a predetermined number of times in accordance with the change pattern, the manner in which the decorative symbol is fluctuated is not changed, so that more attention can be paid to the change suggestion effect.

  In addition, FIG. 13-16 shows a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. . Further, a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more frequently than the change suggestion effect of the successful mode may be provided. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which a change suggestion effect in a successful mode is executed twice consecutively after a change suggestion effect in a failure mode is executed three consecutive times. Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed one or more times, but the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display mode is always displayed when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed. Although the example in which the display mode is changed has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, the active ratio is higher at a higher rate than when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes.For example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when a change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided. An effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes even when a suggested effect is executed may be provided.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher by one step (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode). Blue mode, blue mode to green mode, green mode to red mode, red mode to golden mode), but is not limited to such a mode, and when a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed. May be provided with a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher by two or more levels (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a gold mode). Further, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps may be different depending on the type of the change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of the appearing character). For example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears Is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is set to be high. Is also good. Furthermore, when a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three steps.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Specifically, when the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed based on a fluctuating pattern in which the pseudo symbol fluctuating in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then fluctuated once or more is executed, before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. A change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when the temporary stop is performed n times, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed before each temporary stop (a total of n times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously performed), and thereafter, By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be indicated that the (n + 1) -th temporary stop is not executed. In the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed based on a variation pattern in which the pseudo-run variation is not executed at all, an effect pattern in which only the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the success mode change suggestion effect is not executed. May be provided. In addition, in the case where the decorative symbol change display is executed based on a change pattern in which the pseudo consecutive change is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), n + 1 times success mode change suggestion effects are continuously performed. An effect pattern that is executed but does not execute the change suggestion of the failure mode may be provided.

  In the case of such a configuration, a change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is terminated before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (character). Perform an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, the character A appears and performs an action immediately after the decoration pattern variation display is started, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the special mode, and thereafter the first temporary stop is performed and the first temporary stop is performed. Is started, the character B appears and performs an action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode. After that, the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-change is performed. After the start, the character C may appear and take an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by making the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period for changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol) not to overlap, it is possible to pay attention to the change suggestion effect. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped from being reduced.

  In the case of performing an effect of changing the display direction of the decorative design from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, a change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative design is displayed in the vertical direction (a character appears). It is preferable that the change suggestion effect is terminated before the display direction of the decorative symbol is changed to the horizontal direction (the display mode of the active display is changed by the action of the character). For example, the first character appears and performs an action immediately after the decorative pattern change display is started, and the display form of the active display changes from the normal form to the blue form, and thereafter, the change display direction of the decorative pattern changes from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing at which the change display direction of the decoration symbol changes, the change suggestion effect can be noticed, and the decoration symbol change display can be performed. The effect of the effect when the direction changes can be prevented from being reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. May be an effect that suggests that is changing. For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display. Alternatively, when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

  In the embodiment described above, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is a similar action (the effect acting on the active display or the hold display. Is not limited to such a form, but in a change suggestion effect of a success mode, an appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display while performing the action. In the effect suggesting a change in the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. It should be noted that the action performed by the appeared character may be different between the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect. For example, in the success mode change suggestion effect, the active display or the hold display to be changed is changed. Performing the action of throwing the ball in the direction of (i.e., an effect that affects the active display or the hold display), and in the effect suggesting a change in the failure mode, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or the hold display (the active display or the hold display) It is also possible to perform an effect that does not work).

  In the above-described embodiment, the more the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the more the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period. Is higher, the higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the jackpot expectation degree is shown. . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols or the pseudo consecutive symbol in which the re-variation (pseudo-run) is performed after the temporary stop) is performed. The period may be a period, or may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol again after the decoration symbol re-changes (that is, a period between pseudo-runs). In addition, the predetermined period may be a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, the middle, and the right. It may be a period until the final stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggestion effects are executed, a plurality of patterns may be provided for a period from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the success rate of the next change suggestion effect is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation degree May be higher. In addition, when a change suggestion effect is executed a large number of times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and accordingly, the big hit expectation may be gradually increased. According to such a form, when the change suggestion effect of 1 is completed, the player determines whether or not the next change suggestion effect is to be executed and also determines the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You will be interested and improve your interests.

  In the above embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the active display is changed may be changed according to the current setting value (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the display ratio of the active display is higher in a mode different from the normal mode when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do it. Also, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, three times or more) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The ratio at which the pattern is selected is high, that is, the ratio at which the success suggestion change suggestion effect is executed, and the ratio at which the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous may be high. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6), a change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, an effect in which the character X having a low appearance frequency appears) is higher when the set value is higher (4 to 6) than when the set value is lower (1 to 3). May be increased.

[Other examples of power-on processing]
Next, another example of the power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 14A to 14C are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. -11 and FIGS. 11-43 to 11-44, and the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process is similar to the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 11-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 11-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 0 to 5 or not. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values as set values stored in the set value storage area, and six levels of set values having different big hit probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The setting value 5 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 11-4 and the like described above.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is set in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is assumed to be stored. When the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the data may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode shifts to a setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM4040).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is to be executed. When the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be executed. It indicates that it was done. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

  The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power recovery is 0 (the initial value is not set). The notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described later, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. If the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control has been output (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the flow shifts to the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 14-2. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not interrupted during the setting change ( The setting values are changed and / or changed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070). Alternatively, confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode The process shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to set the state in which the change of the set value is not permitted but the set value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (2) 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). Further, in addition to the conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is determined to be ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value is changed, as described later, the state can be changed to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or there is some irregularity. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

  In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although the control is possible, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is open, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the flow shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. If it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the mode is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and a step S21TM4760 described later is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (Step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in Step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to Step S21TM4120. In checking the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the set value storage area does not store a regular value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 Then, the process shifts to step S21TM4120. When the setting change flag is checked (step S21TM4030) and it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if the normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, control goes to a step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Mode. Also, if the backup RAM area is checked for data (step S21TM4010), but the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Also, if the setting change mode was controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM4140).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes in and after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 14-2 are executed.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. In the closed state, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned on in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not turned on in step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 determines that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing in and after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. Setting value error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  Upon receiving the setting value error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message that “the setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when turning on the power again (when turning on the power switch 21TM055). To perform an operation for changing the set value (determining the set value). For example, a message is displayed that states "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off and shift to the setting change mode." Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until power is turned off.

  In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), and then displays the character “E” on the display monitor 21TM029, so that the “set value is not a regular value (0 to 5)”. It is determined that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that is, all of the determinations in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are determined to be YES) and the transition to the setting change mode has not been established despite the possibility of the possibility ". A notification is issued (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from an output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided for the gaming machines, a call lamp device, or the like). Is done.

  During the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. The provision of the 4 ms weight prevents excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. During the loop processing, the security signal is continuously output. By outputting the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer or the like, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the security signal being input. ), It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode).

  The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be performed in this state. Before proceeding to a normal game process (for example, a game control timer interrupt process including a prize ball process and a special symbol process process shown in FIGS. 11 to 14), the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value. Need to be done. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the CPU 103 can change the set value ( (Setting change mode).

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if the determination in any of Steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 is NO, the process shifts to the above-described loop processing (Steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. No. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to urge the user to turn off the power.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting change is not permitted, but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode). (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the control is not controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), The game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3. In the processing of FIG. 14B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the flow shifts to step S21TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores the regular value in the set value storage area as “0” having the lowest big hit probability. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

  Next, after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530), the CPU 103 executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure or the like has been input. Immediately before the operation becomes impossible due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off processing, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

  Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repetition processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the repetition processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed), If a power failure occurs, the data is properly checked in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (Step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Usually, the clerk of the amusement arcade recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as it is, the clerk of the amusement arcade actually May be incorrectly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the mode has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the flow shifts to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility that the setting is present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area storing the value of the setting change flag is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is set to 1 (set state) at the next power on.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on and when the last power is turned off) is 3 If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 is accordingly updated. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM4620) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determined YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determined NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is kept 0).

  In addition, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and the updating of the setting value (step S21TM4620) can be executed. This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). The determination is made and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processing in step S21TM4540 and thereafter is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (step S21TM1670 in FIG. 11-14) when the normal game process is performed. Until the security signal is output continuously. For example, when the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or whether the setting confirmation mode has ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of either the control of the setting change mode or the control of the setting check mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting check are performed. In response to the end of any control in the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so as to continuously output the security signal until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed irrespective of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or to the setting confirmation mode (determination of which mode is performed). (Without) a common process. In step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also performed regardless of whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (to determine which mode is controlled). No) is performed as a common process. As described above, the output control of the security signal is simplified by controlling the output start control and the output end control of the security signal in common when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , It is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the end of the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode and the case where the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode is a security signal. Set to timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode and the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode, the external device side can use any mode. It will be difficult to determine whether or not it has been controlled.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (2), when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily set in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 to be described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, the security signal timer value is reset to 30000 ms (overwritten). I have. That is, after the security signal remaining output period is once set to 1 sec, the security signal remaining output period is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

  When the above-described signal output control is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 1 sec has elapsed since the start of the setting change mode, and 30 sec has elapsed since the end of the setting change mode.

  Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted. In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 11-14), the security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode ( In the case where the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds, the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-14). In the information output process of step S21TM1670) shown in FIG. It will continue to output the utility signal. When the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at a timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) May be continued from 0 ms until the output of the security signal is completed, and after the output of the security signal ends, the process may shift to the timer interrupt processing for game control.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec between when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is switched to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between the case where control is performed in the setting confirmation mode and the case where control is performed in the setting change mode, while sharing the output control of the security signal.

  As a result, in the external device, it is also possible to know whether the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been changed to the setting change mode. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the mode has been set to the setting confirmation mode without performing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the setting process has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

  It should be noted that a security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area of the RAM 102 (however, an area cleared by the initialization processing) based on detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that a security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set at the time of power restoration.

  Here, if the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 11-13 is not executed), so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is initialized in the signal output processing. The security signal remains set without being changed, and the security signal can be continuously output for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, the output period of the security signal can not be limited to the period until one second elapses from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, if the setting is changed to the setting change mode when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS. 11 to 13 is performed), so that in the subsequent signal output processing, The abnormality detection flag has been cleared (it is unknown whether or not an abnormality was detected when the power was cut off). As a result, the output period of the security signal ends the setting change mode. Until 30 seconds elapse (period according to execution of RAM clear).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 14-2, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the value is initially set after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. The value of the security signal timer to be set in the period may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the processing in step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the setting change flag is cleared and the power is cut off thereafter, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that, even when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the value specified by the set command (the value stored in the set value storage area) as it is in the image. If the setting value is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), and An effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

  The present invention is not limited to this mode, and the CPU 103 sets the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command, and sets the effect control. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the setting value range specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as it is, or executes an effect indicating the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately notify or suggest the set value. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 to perform an addition process on the set value specified by the received setting command, so that the control load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined that the answer is YES in S21TM4020, the power is not interrupted during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). That is, it is only necessary to execute the process at the time of power-off recovery without RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as the processing after step S21TM1340 shown in FIG. Specifically, the processing of steps S21TM1340 to S21TM1370 and steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, is executed. The process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process) shown in FIG. That is, when the control is not performed in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or when the control in the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 or not. Without executing the clearing, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM1370), and the routine shifts to a normal game process.

  In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power interruption based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply is performed (the RAM is not cleared). That). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example, restoration from power cutoff is performed based on data at the time of stopping power supply. (That the RAM is not cleared) can be notified.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the process at the time of power-on with the RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as that after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) shown in FIG. 11-13. Specifically, the processing of steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) to step S21TM1460, the processing of setting 30 seconds as the value of the above-described security signal timer (step S21TM1465), and the processing of steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the backup RAM at power-on The process in the case where the data check result of the area is abnormal is executed, and after the interruption is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process) shown in FIG. 11-14. .

  As shown in FIG. 14C, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time saving flag, and the like) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped is cleared and the initial value is cleared. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared, and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

  The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in the RAM clear processing is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. This means that the data has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, whether the value of the set value storage area has been set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or during the setting change mode This is because a normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a flag for performing a process selectively according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag. Initial value is set.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without restoring from the power failure based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply). ). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the initialization of the game state and the like is performed (when the power supply is stopped). That the RAM has been cleared without recovery from the power failure based on this data).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer without executing step S21TM4710. ), The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, and the value of the security signal timer is set to one second set in step S21TM4710. Remains.

  By setting the value of the security signal timer in this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (see FIG. 11-14). Thereafter, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is reduced by 2 ms, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 11-19 and 11-21 described above). The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to a normal game process in which the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11-14) can be executed. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a large hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is used to determine an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable prize ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power-off restoration (the process after step S21TM1340). If it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass). Depending on the state of the door frame 3a), the processing may be shifted to the processing at the time of power-off recovery (processing after step S21TM1340).

  Further, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). However, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both assumed to be in the closed state (game machine frame). 3 or according to the state of the glass door frame 3a), and may shift to processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, the clerk at the game hall or the like sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize a game state and the like (to execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Can be initialized (that is, the determination in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 is NO and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

  As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting was changed to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value that is to be determined on the game arcade side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and does not shift to the normal game process, and stops the game (step S21). (S21TM4200 to loop processing of step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and to prevent the power from being turned on when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode has been controlled when a disconnection occurs.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode ( When all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are not YES), a set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character “E” on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

  In the example shown in FIG. 14-5, by displaying the letter “E” on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the store clerk of the amusement arcade (in the setting change mode). (It is possible that a power failure has occurred in a controlled state). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays a message on the image display device 5 that “Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode”, thereby displaying Operation to change the set value by turning off the power once (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turning on the power again (when power switch 21TM055 is turned on). (To confirm the set value).

  In this example, (a) the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is open (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). If YES), the control is switched to the setting change mode. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power off and then on again Please shift to the setting change mode. ").

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 receiving the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “setting change mode is in progress” or a message “change setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on image display device 5. Thus, the store clerk at the game hall can grasp that the setting is changed to the setting change mode. By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is obtained. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the set value to the set value, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled to the setting change mode. . As a result, an error is displayed on the main board 11 (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the effect control board 12 ("Power is turned on again after power is turned off"). To change to the setting change mode. ").

  In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). And then shift to the setting change mode ”), the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored despite the power interruption during the setting change mode It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk at the game hall grasps that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating such that all of the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the expected set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  As described above, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be properly notified when the power is restored.

  Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied at the time of power restoration (a), an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. Since the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being displayed, unnecessary error display can be avoided, and the setting value can be appropriately changed.

  On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied at the time of power restoration (b), the system cannot shift to the setting change mode at the time of power restoration, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since the game is in the state, the game is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed. Will be done. This makes it possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value has not been determined, thereby realizing appropriate game control.

  If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii), a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal depending on whether any of the conditions is not satisfied.

  For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (or the condition for shifting is satisfied). Is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the command, and displays a message "The setting value may be abnormal" and a message "The setting is automatically controlled to the setting change mode". It is good to display on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated. In response to the operation (change from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch (clear switch) In response to the operation of the 21TM052 (change from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) performs the setting based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and It can be checked whether or not the operation is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game process, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated, The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 14A, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the setting is performed, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  The present invention is not limited to this mode. As shown in FIG. 14-6, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the condition is satisfied.

  In the process shown in FIG. 14-6, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If it has been performed (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The part that is controlled in the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stop state (the processing corresponding to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 14A. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-3.

  Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when a power failure occurs during the change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14-6, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. The state is controlled and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the three conditions (determined NO in step S21TM4570). When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed (YES in step S21TM4030). Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the control is forcibly controlled to the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. Is automatically controlled to the setting change mode irrespective of whether or not is established, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

  Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition that (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 14-2).

  As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (determining YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation, once the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, in order to fix the set value and terminate the setting change mode, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set. On the other hand, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. The game is appropriately shifted to the normal game process.

  Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification that prompts the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 may be issued. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says "Please turn on the lock switch once and switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processing shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-3 and FIG. 14-6, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting change flag is set. For this reason, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take a measure for fixing the set value.

(Set value storage control in case of power failure during setting value change)
Next, the setting value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 14-7. In the example shown in FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 12-2 described above, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is operated by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. It will change itself.

  First, FIG. 14 shows a control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode. This will be described using -7 (1).

  As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in the order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  Next, as shown in the order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in the order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the operation of the second setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 performed. Is changed to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  Next, as shown in the order 5, it is assumed that in the setting change mode, the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in the order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  When the power is turned on in the order 6, since the setting change flag is set, even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared) when the control shown in FIG. 14-6 is applied. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

  As described above, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without terminating the setting change mode), the power supply is restored when the power is restored. In this state, the set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been scheduled may be set. In this case, the clerk of the game arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the set value again. It is sufficient to shift the gaming machine to the normal game processing, so that workability can be improved.

  Next, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

  Orders 1 to 4 are the same as in the example shown in FIG. 14-7 (1), and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in the order 5, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state in the setting change mode, the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  After that, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  As shown in FIGS. 14-7 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode ends. In any case, when the power is restored, the set value changed in accordance with the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is used. , The effective set value (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

  The storage control of the set values shown in FIG. 14-7 is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIG. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is controlled in the setting change mode. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value of the setting value storage area, and the operation of terminating the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (by overwriting) based on the fact that the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state is performed, and the setting value is determined. May be. In this case, the setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting is changed to the setting change mode upon power-on and a setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. If the power is turned off without completing the operation of ending the change mode (without turning off the lock switch 21TM051), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is This means that no change has been made since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is last turned on is continuously held. Accordingly, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on. It becomes a value corresponding to the set value that was set.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately set the set value in the case where the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  In the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode described in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability according to the setting value is provided. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this. Although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to gaming machines whose jackpot probability is 1/300).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko gaming machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Display means having at least a first numerical display area and a second numerical display area;
Effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect for updating a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area to a specific value, and a special effect for suggesting the predetermined effect. When,
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area as the special effect,
further,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating that it is controlled to an advantageous state,
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
A gaming machine, wherein the title notifying means is capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.